OM60Q78U

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Lexus LX 570 Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 628

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety
and security

Make sure to read through them

Instrument cluster

How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.

Operation of
each component

Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.

Driving

Operations and advice which are necessary for driving

Interior features

Usage of the interior features, etc.

Maintenance
and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

When trouble
arises

What to do in case of malfunction or emergency

Vehicle
specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Search by symptom
Search alphabetically

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information................................... 8
Reading this manual...................................12
How to search..............................................13
Pictorial index...............................................14
1

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
Before driving ................................ 26
For safe driving .............................. 28
Seat belts..........................................30
SRS airbags.....................................38
Front passenger occupant
classification system .................50
Safety information for
children .......................................... 56
Child restraint systems............... 57
Installing child restraints............. 62
Exhaust gas precautions.............74
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system....... 75
Alarm ..................................................77
2

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators....................................... 82
Gauges and meters.....................88
Multi-information display ............91
Head-up display.......................... 100
Fuel consumption
information ................................. 105

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each
component

3-1. Key information
Keys....................................................110
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors........................................ 115
Back door .......................................122
Smart access system with
push-button start.......................132
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ..................................... 140
Rear seats .......................................142
Driving position memory........... 151
Head restraints ............................ 155
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel............................. 158
Inside rear view mirror ............. 160
Outside rear view mirrors .......162
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows............................165
Moon roof...................................... 168

Driving

4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle ......................174
Cargo and luggage ................... 182
Vehicle load limits ...................... 186
Trailer towing ................................187
Dinghy towing.............................204
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch...........205
Automatic transmission ........... 210
Turn signal lever...........................217
Parking brake............................... 218
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch ..........................221
Automatic High Beam............. 224
Fog light switch........................... 229
Windshield wipers and
washer ...........................................231
Rear window wiper and
washer ......................................... 235
Headlight cleaner switch........238
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 239

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Lexus Safety System+.............. 242
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) ....................................... 249
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)..............................................261
Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed
range............................................ 269
Cruise control.............................. 281
Driving mode select
switch...........................................284
Intuitive parking assist.............. 287
4-Wheel AHC (Active
Height Control
Suspension)............................... 295
Four-wheel drive system ........303
Crawl Control (with Turn
Assist function) ........................ 307
Multi-terrain Select.....................312
Multi-terrain Monitor.................316
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)..... 363
• BSM function......................... 367
• RCTA function........................371
Driving assist systems ...............377
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.....................382
Off-road precautions...............386

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch/12.3-inch
display.......................................... 392
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge .....398
5-3. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic air
conditioning system...............399
Rear air conditioning
system........................................... 410
Heated steering wheel/seat
heaters/seat ventilators .........413
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ...........................417
• Interior lights........................... 418
• Personal lights.........................419

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features............420
• Glove box.................................421
• Console box ............................421
• Overhead console.............. 422
• Cup holders........................... 423
• Bottle holders........................ 424
• Card holder ........................... 424
• Auxiliary boxes..................... 425
Luggage compartment
features ........................................427
5-6. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features............430
• Cool box..................................430
• Sun visors..................................431
• Vanity mirrors .........................431
• Clock ........................................ 432
• Power outlets ........................ 433
• Wireless charger ................. 435
• Armrest.................................... 442
• Rear door sunshades ......... 443
• Coat hooks............................. 443
• Assist grips ............................. 444
Garage door opener ............... 445
LEXUS Enform Safety
Connect...................................... 452

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ................458
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior....................461
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ............................ 464
General maintenance.............. 466
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs.................................... 469
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................ 470
Hood................................................472
Engine compartment ............... 473
Tires.................................................486
Tire inflation pressure ..............495
Wheels ........................................... 499
Air conditioning filter ................ 501
Electronic key battery..............503
Checking and replacing
fuses..............................................505
Light bulbs ....................................508

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers................... 510
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency ...... 511
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed .................................512
If you think something is
wrong............................................ 518
Fuel pump shut off system........519
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds .........................................520
If a warning message is
displayed ....................................528
If you have a flat tire .................. 532
If the engine will not start........ 544
If the electronic key does
not operate properly............. 546
If the vehicle battery is
discharged................................. 549
If your vehicle overheats.........552
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................................555

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ..................558
Fuel information .........................566
Tire information ..........................569

Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)...............................608
Alphabetical index ..................................612

8-2. Customization
Customizable features ............580
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.........................593
9

For owners

Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ....................................596
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).............................................. 597
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..............................................599

For vehicles with a navigation system or a multimedia system, refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding
the equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Audio/video system
• Rear seat entertainment system
• Hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your
vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However,
because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to
make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your
vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from
under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage
check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any
damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with
non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems
resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic
systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Lexus Safety System+
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

9
Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain
data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is
equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record
images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.
● Data transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Lexus without notification to you.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle
is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
● Usage of data collected through Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please
refer to the Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information
on data collected and its usage.
● To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Lexus,

please visit www.lexus.com/privacyvts/.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

10
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

11
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as
they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS
airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or
by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and
certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which
could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or
pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the
driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a
collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon
roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Reading this manual
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury
to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in
numerical order.
Indicates the action (pushing,
turning, etc.) used to operate
switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”,
or “Do not let this happen”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

How to search
■ Searching by name

• Alphabetical index................. P. 612

■ Searching by installation position

• Pictorial index............................. P. 14

■ Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)................P. 608

■ Searching by title

• Table of contents.........................P. 2

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

Pictorial index
■ Exterior

Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115

Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122

Locking/unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 115
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 546
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 522, 528
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 123
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 522, 528

3 Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162

Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162
Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162
Driving position memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 151
Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 405

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

4 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 231

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 382
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 405
Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 459

5 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239

Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 560

6 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 486

Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 565
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 382
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 486
Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 532

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 472
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 472
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 560
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 552

8 Camera*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 316

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
9 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
10 Parking lights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
11 Fog lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 229
12 Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
13 Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Hill-start assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 377

14 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
15 Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210

16 Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

*: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

■ Instrument panel

Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205

Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210

Starting the engine/changing the modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 511
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 544
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 528
Changing the shift position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 512
When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 215

3 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 88

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 88
Warning lights/indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 82
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 520

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

4 Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 91
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 528

5 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 218

Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 218
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 383
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 220, 528

6 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217

Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 229

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 231
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 231, 235
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 485
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 528

8 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 510
9 Fuel filler door opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 240
10 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 472
11 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158
Driving position memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 151

12 Front air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 399

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 399
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 405

13 Audio system*

Hands-free system*

*: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

■ Switches

Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162

Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165

3 Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117
4 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165
5 Driving position memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 151
6 Automatic High Beam switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 224
7

Headlight cleaner switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 238

8 HUD (Head-up display) switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100
9 Easy access mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 297
10 Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89
11 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 487

PCS (Pre-Collision System) switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 253

3 Power back door switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122
4 Power back door main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122
5 VIEW switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 316
6 Intuitive parking assist switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 287

*: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

Audio remote control switches*1

Talk switch*1

3 Telephone switches*1
4 Meter control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 93
5 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 269
6 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261
7

Cruise control switch

Cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 281
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 269

8 Paddle shift switches*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 212

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

Crawl Control switches/Multi-terrain Select mode
selector switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 307, 312

VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 378

3 Center differential lock/unlock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 304
4 Second start mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
5 Four-wheel drive control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 303
6 Height select/height control OFF switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 295
7

Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 284

8 Front seat heater/ventilator switches*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 413
9 Heated steering wheel switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414
10 Remote Touch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 392

*1: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

■ Interior

SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38

Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 26

3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 140
4 Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142
5 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 155
6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 30
7

Console box*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 420
Cool box*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 430

8 Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117
9 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 420
10 Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 420
11 Rear air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 410
12 Rear seat entertainment system*1, 2
13 Assist grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 444

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 431

3 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 431
4 Personal/interior lights*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 417
5 Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 168
6 “SOS” button*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 452
7

Garage door opener buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 445

*1: If equipped

*2: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
3

: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving................................. 26
For safe driving ..............................28
Seat belts ..........................................30
SRS airbags .....................................38
Front passenger occupant
classification system..................50
Safety information for
children ..........................................56
Child restraint systems ............... 57
Installing child restraints............. 62
Exhaust gas precautions............ 74
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system....... 75
Alarm ..................................................77

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Before driving
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and
model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
1

Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into
the floor mat eyelets.

Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor
mats in place.

*: Always align the

marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in

the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in
P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the floor
mat.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to
stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving

1-1. For safe use

For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before
driving.

Correct driving posture
1

Adjust the angle of the seatback so
that you are sitting straight up and so
that you do not have to lean forward
to steer. (→P. 140)

Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so that
your arms bend slightly at the elbow
when gripping the steering wheel.
(→P. 140)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to
the top of your ears. (→P. 155)

Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 30)

Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P. 30)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 57)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside
rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 160, 162)
WARNING

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop
the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving
and take a break immediately.

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so that it

comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt (except for the third center seat)
1

To fasten the seat belt, push the plate
into the buckle until a click sound is
heard.

To release the seat belt, press the
release button.
Release button

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Fastening and releasing the third center seat belt (if equipped)
1

Pull out the tab.
Tab B

For safety and security

Tab A

Push tab B into buckle B until a clicking sound is heard.
Tab B

Buckle B
3

Push tab A into buckle A until a
clicking sound is heard.
To release, push the release button on
buckle A.

Tab A
Release button

Buckle A

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Releasing and stowing the third center seat belt (if equipped)
1

Push the release button on buckle A.

Buckle A
2

Push either the mechanical key or
tab A into buckle B.
When releasing and storing the seat
belt, hold the belt while winding it back
gently.

Buckle B

Tab A
3

Put tabs A and B together and stow
them in the holder.

Tab B

To reattach the seat belt, reverse the
above procedure, pulling out the tabs
and inserting tab B into buckle B.

Tab A

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front and second outboard seats)
1

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
down while pressing the release button.

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
up.

Move the height adjuster up and down
as needed until you hear a click.

For safety and security

Seat belt pretensioners (front and second outboard seats)
The pretensioners help the seat belts to
quickly restrain the occupants by
retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate in the
event of a minor frontal impact, a side
impact or a rear impact.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can
move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 62)
■ When the third center seat belt cannot be extended (if equipped)
Put your fingers between the seat belt and the
holder.
Pull the seat belt forcefully in the direction of the
arrow and then release it to unlock.

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 57)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow
the instructions on P. 30 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first
collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your
Lexus dealer free of charge.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (→P. 30)
Women who are pregnant should position the
lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the
same manner as other occupants, extending
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder
and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of
the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer
death or serious injury as a result of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt
and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The
seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in
the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women

1-1. For safe use
WARNING

■ When the children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around
a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the
belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the
seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder.
The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious
injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 33)
■ When using the third center seat belt (if equipped)
Do not use the third center seat belt with either
buckle released. Fastening only one of the
buckles may result in death or serious injury in
case of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.

■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in

the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do
not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot protect an
occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a
serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling
may lead to incorrect operation.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the

belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another
person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

■ Using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not
on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

NOTICE

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work
together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

◆ SRS front airbags
1

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the second outboard seats

SRS curtain shield airbags
● Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outboard seats
● Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in
the event of vehicle rollover

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

Knee airbags

Airbag sensor assembly

Curtain shield airbags

Front impact sensors

Front passenger airbag

Side impact sensors (front door)

Seat belt pretensioners and force
limiters (front seats)

Front side airbags

Driver’s seat position sensor

SRS warning light

Side impact sensors (rear)

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights

Rear side airbags (second outboard
seat)

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

Safing sensor (rear)

Seat belt pretensioners (second
outboard seats)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the
US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly
(ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information
includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear
margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to
your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of
the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road,
raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward
your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel
controls.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

1-1. For safe use
WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been connected

to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt
extender has not also been fastened to the
latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though
the seat belt has not been connected. In this
case, the SRS front airbags may not activate
correctly in a collision, resulting in death or
serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure
to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The
front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously
injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front
passenger seat. (→P. 57)
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean

against the dashboard.

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the

SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the
knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold
items on their knees.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail

or the front, side and rear pillars.

ger seats toward the door or put their head or
hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything

against areas such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when the
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags
deploy.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passen-

1-1. For safe use
WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to areas such as a

door, windshield glass, side door glass, front
or rear pillars, roof side rail and assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items

could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate
as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the
side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger
may not deploy in the event of a collision.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the

extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the

front seats, parts of the front, side and rear pillars and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event
of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the
“SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the
level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the
necessary emergency services. (→P. 452)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without
consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate)
accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats, seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or
roof luggage carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

1-1. For safe use

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set thresh-

old level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30
km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will
activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force
produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle
cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate
speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the
illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of
the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

For safety and security

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags

(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a
collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if
it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear
collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed
frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the SRS front
airbags to inflate.

damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was
involved in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-

board near the front passenger airbag or
lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is

scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front, side and rear pillars or

roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked or otherwise damaged.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

SRS warning light



For the U.S.A.

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light



For Canada

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification
system
■ Adult*1

“AIR BAG ON”

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Off*2 or flashing*3

Indicator/
warning light

Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
■ Child*4 or child restraint system with infant*5

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG OFF”*6

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Off*2 or
flashing*3

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Indicator/
warning light

Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

1-1. For safe use
■ Unoccupied

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light

Not illuminated

SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

Deactivated

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
■ There is a malfunction in the system

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light
On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

Deactivated

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*4: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her
physique or posture.
ward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger
seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 57)

*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the
child restraint system properly. (→P. 62)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A for-

1-1. For safe use
WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat
belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not
activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback
pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the
front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the
seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches the rear seat. This

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that
the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it
does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully
rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (→P. 62)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the
SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger
occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

1-1. For safe use

Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental con-

tact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid
children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally. (→P. 118, 165)
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body
parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats etc.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof
or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/
shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child
restraint systems.

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer
than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to
the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint
system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (→P. 62)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Points to remember

1-1. For safe use

Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the
age and size of the child:




Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

Booster seat

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)



Forward facing ⎯ Convertible
seat

1-1. For safe use

■ When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat

When you have to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the following:
● The seatback to the most upright position
● The seat cushion to the fully rearward and
highest position
● The seat belt height to the lowest position

For safety and security

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the

vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 30)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use
WARNING

■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be

properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age
and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint
system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the
size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and
always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front
or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender
connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the
SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the
child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured
properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden
stop, sudden swerve or accident.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure
the child restraints to the outboard second seats using the LATCH anchors or
a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the
second outboard seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are
attached to the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism (ALR/
ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)

Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for all
second seats.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Installation with LATCH system
1

Fold the seatback forward and then
adjust it as upright as possible.

Take off the covers between the seat
cushion and seatback, then confirm
the position of the LATCH anchors
below the symbol in the seatback.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

64


1-1. For safe use

Type A

Latch the hooks of the lower straps
onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether
strap, the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only


Type B

Latch the buckles onto the LATCH
anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether
strap, the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function
belt)
■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/Convertible seat
1

Fold the seatback while pulling
the seatback angle lever. Return
the seatback and secure it at the
first lock position. (→P. 142)

Place the child restraint system
on the second seat or the third
outboard seat (if equipped) facing the rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
4

Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.

While pushing the child restraint
system down into the second
seat, allow the shoulder belt to
retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted
to a point where there is no slack in
the belt, pull the belt to check that it
cannot be extended.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat
1

Fold the seatback while pulling
the seatback angle lever. Return
the seatback and secure it at the
first lock position. (→P. 142)
1

Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
4

Fully extend the shoulder strap
and then allow it to retract slightly
into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.

While pushing the child restraint
system into the second seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted
to a point where there is no slack in
the belt, pull the belt to check that it
cannot be extended.

If the child restraint system has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 70)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Booster seat
1

Fold the seatback while pulling
the seatback angle lever. Return
the seatback and secure it at the
first lock position. (→P. 142)
1

Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer’s instructions
and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (→P. 30)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button and fully
retract the seat belt.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap


Second outboard seats

Secure the child restraint system
using a seat belt or LATCH anchors,
and move the head restraint in place
at the upmost position.

Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use
3

Adjust the head restraint to the
downmost position.

Second center seat

Secure the child restraint system
using a seat belt and remove the
head restraint.

Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.

Install the head restraint.

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to Anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be
used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security



1-1. For safe use
WARNING

■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder
belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to
the child. (→P. 34)
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the
child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers
may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child

restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does
not interfere with the child restraint system.
● Vehicles with third seats: Child restraint system installed on the third seat should not contact the second seatbacks.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint sys-

tem on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible even if
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

● When installing a child restraint system on the second center seat, adjust both seat

cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. The seatbacks must be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat as far
back as possible, with the seatback close to the child restraint system.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s
neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure
that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child restraint systems in second or third row seats, it
may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your
seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it
interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will
not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the
anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to
the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the back door closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the
windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the
engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure
that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing.
If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused
by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle
inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s onboard computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after the
engine switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after
the engine switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that the system has
been canceled.
■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a

built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee
absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system


For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico



For vehicles sold in Canada

WARNING
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Alarm
The alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

Setting the alarm system
Close the doors and hood, and lock all
the doors using the entry function or
wireless remote control. The system will
be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being
on to flashing when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors using the entry function or wireless remote control.
● Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start
the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry
function or wireless remote control. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
● The battery is reconnected.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following.
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● The doors are unlocked using the mechanical
key.

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door or

hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an inside
lock button.

● The battery is recharged or replaced when the

vehicle is locked. (→P. 549)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1-2. Theft deterrent system

■ Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to
prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
● When recharging or replacing the battery.
NOTICE
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

1-2. Theft deterrent system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

2
2.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators.......................................82
Gauges and meters .....................88
Multi-information display ............91
Head-up display ..........................100
Fuel consumption
information ................................. 105

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel
inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration display all warning
lights and indicators illuminated.

The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending
on the target region.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems.
*1

Brake system warning light
(→P. 520)

Automatic headlight
leveling system warning
light (→P. 521)

Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light
(→P. 522)

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light
(→P. 520)

(Canada)

Charging system warning
light (→P. 520)

Center differential lock
indicator light (→P. 522)

Malfunction indicator lamp
(→P. 520)

Open door warning light
(→P. 522)

Malfunction indicator lamp
(→P. 520)

Low fuel level warning light
(→P. 522)

SRS warning light
(→P. 520)

Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (→P. 522)

(U.S.A.)

*1
(Canada)

ABS warning light
(→P. 520)

Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light (→P. 522)

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light
(→P. 520)

Master warning light
(→P. 522)

(Canada)

*1, 4

PCS warning light
(→P. 521)

Tire pressure warning light
(→P. 522)

(if equipped)

Slip indicator light
(→P. 521)

*2
(U.S.A.)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Parking brake indicator
(→P. 522)

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

Parking brake indicator
(→P. 522)

Power steering system
warning light (→P. 522)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light
(→P. 523)

Brake Override System
warning light (→P. 175)

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is
on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not
turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*3: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*4: The light flashes or illuminates to indicate a malfunction.
*5: This light is displayed on the multi-information display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 217)
Headlight indicator
(→P. 221)

(U.S.A.)

(if equipped)

*1, 2

Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 222)
Automatic High Beam
indicator (→P. 224)

VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 378)
Multi-terrain Select
indicator (→P. 312)

Crawl Control indicator
(→P. 307)

Fog light indicator
(→P. 229)

Automatic transmission
second start indicator
(→P. 210)

Eco Driving Indicator
Light (→P. 87)

Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light
(→P. 303)

Cruise control indicator
(→P. 281, 269)

Center differential lock
indicator (→P. 304)

Cruise control “SET”
indicator (→P. 281, 269)

(if equipped)

Slip indicator (→P. 378)

Dynamic radar cruise
control indicator
(→P. 269)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Easy access mode
indicator (→P. 295)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator (→P. 287)

Instrument cluster

(Canada)

Tail light indicator
(→P. 221)

LDA indicator (→P. 261)

2. Instrument cluster

*1, 3

PCS warning light
(→P. 249)

Turn Assist indicator
(→P. 307)

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
indicator (→P. 363)

Parking brake indicator
(→P. 218)

(if equipped)

*4, 5

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
outside rear view mirror
indicators (→P. 363)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) indicator (→P. 371)

TRAC OFF indicator
(→P. 378)

“AIR BAG ON/
OFF” indicator
(→P. 50)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Parking brake indicator
(→P. 218)

Low outside temperature
indicator (→P. 88)
Smart access system with
push-button start indicator
(→P. 205, 547)

* : These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to
1

indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is
on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not
turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light turns on when the system is turned off.
*4: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:
• When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode while the system is set
to on.
• When the system is set to on while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators
will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off,
there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*5: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*6: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*7: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the indicator
will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

*8: This light is displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Eco Driving Indicator Light

WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the Multi Terrain ABS and the SRS warning light
not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not
available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious
injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

During Eco-Friendly acceleration operation
(Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will
turn on. When the acceleration exceeds Zone
of Eco driving (→P. 98), or when the vehicle is
stopped, the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in
the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● The vehicle is set to second start mode. (→P. 210)
● The vehicle is set to sport mode or customized mode. (→P. 284)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 81 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
● The Crawl Control is operating. (→P. 307)
● The paddle shift switch (if equipped) is operating.

2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.
1

Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure

Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed

Voltmeter
Displays the charge state

Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature

Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (→P. 91)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster
8

Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Shift position and shift range display
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (→P. 210)

4-Wheel AHC display
Display the status of 4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension). (→P. 295)

Outside temperature

Odometer/trip meter display change button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays

Instrument panel light control dial
The brightness of the instrument panel light can be adjusted

Changing the display
Switches between odometer and trip
meter displays. When the trip meter is
displayed, pressing and holding the
button will reset the trip meter.

Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1

Darker

Brighter

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F
(50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature
is 37°F (3°C) or lower.

2. Instrument cluster

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights

When the tail lights are turned on, the meter’s brightness will be reduced slightly unless
the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest setting.
If the tail lights are turned on when the surroundings are dark, the meter’s brightness will
be reduced slightly. However, when the surroundings are bright, such as during the daytime, the meter’s brightness will not be reduced even if the tail lights are turned on.
■ Customization
The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display. (→P. 580)
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information
display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond
slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing
rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or
injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates

the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red

zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the
engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 552)
■ Voltmeter
When the voltmeter indicates 19 V or higher or 9 V or lower while the engine is running, there may be a battery or charging system malfunction. Have the vehicle
inspected at your Lexus dealer.
■ Engine oil pressure gauge
When the value of the engine oil pressure gauge drops while the engine is running,
stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and check the amount of engine oil.
(→ P. 475)
When the oil pressure drops even though the engine oil amount has not decreased, or
if the oil pressure does not increase when engine oil is added, contact your Lexus
dealer, as there may be a problem with the lubrication system.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display
Display contents
The following information will be displayed when a menu icon is selected.
(→P. 93)
Some of the information may be displayed automatically depending on the
situation.

Select to display various drive data. (→P. 94)

Vehicle information display (if equipped)
Select to display the vehicle information. (→P. 95)

Navigation system-linked display
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)

Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the display using the
meter control switches.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

Drive information

2. Instrument cluster

Driving assist system information (if equipped)
Select to display the operational status of the following systems:
• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 269)
When the vehicle is in constant speed control mode (→P. 277), the menu
icon will change to

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P. 261)

Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is
detected. (→P. 528)

Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings and the operation settings of some
vehicle functions. (→P. 96)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Operating the meter control switches
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.
1

: Switch menu
: Change displayed content, scroll up/down the
screen and move the
cursor up/down

Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset
Return to the previous screen

Press: Displays the screen registered to
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be displayed.

Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen to
When the confirmation screen is displayed, select yes to register the screen. If the
selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be shown.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

Drive information
■ Drive information

4 of the following items can be registered and displayed as the drive information 1 and the drive information 2 (2 items on each screen).
Refer to P. 96 for the registration method of the drive information 1 and the
drive information 2.
● Current fuel consumption (bar type/value type)
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
● Average fuel consumption (after reset*2/after start/after refuel)*1
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset, the
engine was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respectively.
● Average vehicle speed (after reset*2/after start)
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset and the
engine was started, respectively.
● Elapsed time (after reset*2/after start)
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the engine was
started, respectively.
● Distance (driving range/after start)
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

*1: Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
*2: The function can be reset by pressing for longer than 1 second when the item to
reset is displayed. If there is more than one item that can be reset, the item selection
screen will appear.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

■ Eco Indicator (Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display)

→P. 98
■ Speed

Displays the vehicle speed.
■ Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F
(50°C).
■ Sway warning (if equipped)

This display is a part of the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. The display is
enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway warning are met.
(→P. 261)
■ Blank screen (display off)

Drive information is not displayed.

Vehicle information
■ Front tire angle (if equipped)

Displays the direction of the front tires.
The tire direction is displayed in 3 stages for both left and right, in accordance with
the angle of the tire.
If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the display may be disabled
temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display will be enabled.
■ Tire inflation pressure

Displays inflation pressure of each tire.
The inflation pressure of the spare tire will be displayed.
■ Oil maintenance (if equipped)

Displays the remaining distance before the next maintenance is required.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associated with a
decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the decrease in attention
using a bar display.
The shorter the bar length, the more the driver may need to rest.

2. Instrument cluster

Settings display
The settings of some features can be changed by using the meter control
switches.
■ Setting procedure

For functions that can be enabled or disabled, the function switches between
on and off each time
is pressed.
■ Setting items
●

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)*

Select to set up LDA. (→P. 580)
• Alert method
• Alert sensitivity
• Sway warning
• Sway sensitivity
●
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
Select to set up BSM. (→P. 580)
• BSM on/off
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on/off
● Head-up display*
Select to set up Head-up display. (→P. 580)
• Display brightness/location
• Display content
● Scheduled maintenance
Select to reset the message indicating maintenance is required.
● Oil maintenance*

Select to reset the engine oil maintenance information

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

● Meter settings

Select to set the following items.
• Language
Select to change the language on the display.
• Units
Select to change the unit for measure.
•

Eco Driving Indicator Light
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light. (→P. 87)

•

switch settings
You can register 1 screen as the top screen. To register, press and hold

while the desired screen is displayed.
Drive information 1 and 2
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a drive information screen, up to 2 drive information screens can be set.
Pop-up display
Select to set the pop-up displays, which may appear in some situations,
on/off. (→P. 98)
Accent color
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the cursor
color.
Initialization
Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned to
their default setting.

Instrument cluster

•

*: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

■ Eco Driving Indicator
1
2

Eco Driving Indicator Light (→P. 87)
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with current
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, the right side of Eco Driving Indicator
Zone Display will illuminate.
Zone of Eco driving

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The drive information will be reset (only items that can be reset manually).
■ Pop-Up display

The pop-up display is displayed on the multi-information display according to the operating conditions of the following functions:
● Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked system
● Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system (if equipped)
The pop-up display function can be disabled. (→P. 96)
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
● “---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavorable
radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ When setting up the display
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P.
■ Suspension of the settings display
In the following situations, the settings display using the meter control switches will be
suspended.
● When a warning message appears on the multi-information display
● When the vehicle begins to move
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving

For safety, avoid operating the meter control switch while driving as much as possible,
and do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving. Stop the
vehicle and operate the meter control switch. Failure to do so may cause a steering
wheel operation error, resulting in an unexpected accident.
■ Cautions while setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle
is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ While setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

NOTICE

100

2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display∗
Summary of functions
The head-up display is linked to the meters and navigation system and projects a
variety of information in front of the driver, such as the current vehicle speed and
route guidance to a set destination.

Navigation system-linked display area (→P. 102)
Displays the following items, which are linked to the navigation system:
• Route guidance to destination
• Compass

Message display area (→P. 102)
Displays the following items:
• Warning/Message (if equipped)
• Audio system operation status
• Outside temperature

Warning and information icons (→P. 102)

Vehicle speed display area
Displays the following items:
• Vehicle speed
• Speed limit

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster
5

101

Driving assist system status display area (if equipped)
Select to display the operational status of the following systems:
• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 269)
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P. 261)
• Intuitive parking assist (→P. 287)
Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display. For
details, refer to the explanations of each system.

HUD (Head-up display) switch (→P. 101)

Using the head-up display
◆ Enabling/Disabling the head-up display

◆ Changing settings of the head-up display
Select
on the multi-information display (→P. 91), and then select “HUD”
to change the following settings:
■ Display brightness/location

Select to adjust the brightness and location of the head-up display.
■ Display content

Select to enable/disable the following items:
•
•
•
•

Route guidance to destination
Driving assist system status
Compass
Audio system operation status

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

Press the HUD (head-up display)
switch.

102

2. Instrument cluster

Warning and information icons
Displays the following multi-information display linked icons:
: Master warning icon
Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information
display. (→P. 528)
: Information icon
Displayed when a suggestion/advice pop-up display is displayed on the
multi-information display. (→P. 91)

Message display area
Displays the following items in the appropriate situation:
■ Warning/Message (if equipped)

Displays the following system warning/messages:
• Pre-collision warning (pre-collision system)
• Notification message (Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range)
■ Audio system operation status

Displayed when the audio system is operated.
■ Outside temperature

Displayed in the following situations:
• When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode
• When the low outside temperature indicator is flashing
Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P. 88)

Navigation system-linked display area
Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system:
■ Route guidance to destination

Displayed when the navigation system is performing route guidance. When
approaching an intersection, an arrow will be displayed to indicate the suggested direction of travel.
■ Compass

Displays the direction of travel.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

103

■ Head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark or hard to see when viewed through sunglasses,
especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.
■ When the battery is disconnected
The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.
■ Display brightness
● The brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted on

WARNING
■ Before using the head-up display
● Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not inter-

fere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may
obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not continuously look at the head-up display while driving as you may fail to see
pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
■ Caution for changing settings of the head-up display
As the engine needs to be running while changing the settings of the head-up display,
ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect
and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

of the multi-information
display. Also, it is automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness.
● When the vehicle is stopped, the display may dim temporarily. This is not a malfunction.
■ Enabling/disabling of the head-up display
If the head-up display is disabled, it will remain disabled when the engine switch is turned
off then back to IGNITION ON mode.
■ Head-up display automatic position adjustment
If the display position is recorded into memory, the head-up display will be automatically
adjusted to the desired position. (→P. 151)

104

2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to components
● Do not place any drinks near the head-up dis-

play projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result.
● Do not place anything on or put stickers onto
the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up display
indications.
● Do not touch the inside of the head-up display
projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into
the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.
■ When changing the settings of the head-up display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while the changing the
settings of the head-up display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

105

Fuel consumption information
Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the Remote Touch screen.
The fuel consumption information can be displayed and operated on the side
display.
Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch knob (→P. 392)

“MENU” button

“ENTER” button

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

106

2. Instrument cluster

Fuel consumption
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen, and then select “Fuel Consumption”.
■ Trip information

If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.
1

Resetting the consumption data

Fuel consumption in the past 15
minutes

Current fuel consumption

Average vehicle speed since the
engine was started.

Elapsed time since the engine
was started.

Cruising range (→P. 107)
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past
averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

107

■ Past record

If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
1

Resetting the past record data

Best recorded fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Previous fuel consumption record

Updating the average fuel consumption data

■ Updating the past record data

Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel
consumption again.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Use the
displayed average fuel consumption
as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

108

2. Instrument cluster

Using the side display
Vehicle information can be displayed on the side display (→P. 397), then select
or
to select the desired screen.


Fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel consumption
for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as the cruising range.



Past record

Displays the average fuel consumption
and highest fuel consumption.



Trip information

Displays the cruising range, average
fuel consumption and the amount of
time elapsed since the engine was
started.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

109

Operation of
each component

3
3-1. Key information
Keys ....................................................110
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors........................................115
Back door........................................122
Smart access system with
push-button start...................... 132
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats...................................... 140
Rear seats........................................142
Driving position memory...........151
Head restraints ............................ 155
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ............................. 158
Inside rear view mirror ............. 160
Outside rear view mirrors........162
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows ........................... 165
Moon roof...................................... 168

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

110

3-1. Key information

Keys
The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys

• Operating the smart access system
with push-button start (→P. 132)
• Operating the wireless remote control function
2

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Card key (electronic key)
Operating the smart access system with
push-button start (→P. 132)

Wireless remote control
1

Locks the doors (→P. 115)

Unlocks the doors (→P. 115)

Opens the windows and moon roof *
(→P. 115)

Opens/closes the power back door
(→P. 122)

Sounds the alarm (→P. 111)

*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-1. Key information

111

Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key only
has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it
over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it
in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key.
If the electronic key battery is depleted
or the entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the mechanical
key. (→P. 546)

When
is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound intermittently
and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.
■ Card key
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only in an emer-

gency, such as when the key does not operate properly.

● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a

pen tip etc. If it is difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card key,
insert it inside while pressing the lock release
button.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

■ Panic mode

112

3-1. Key information

● If the battery cover is not installed and the bat-

tery falls out or if the battery was removed
because the key got wet, reinstall the battery
with the positive terminal facing the Lexus
emblem.

● The card key is not waterproof.
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 421)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using another
mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate
in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic
key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally.
Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere
with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a
half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops.
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted
even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 503)
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the
following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-1. Key information

113

■ Replacing the key battery

→P. 503
■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus
dealer.
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to

such materials.

● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.

● Do not disassemble the keys.

systems and induction cookers.

● Do not place the keys near medical electrical equipment such as low-frequency ther-

apy equipment or microwave therapy equipment, and do not receive medical attention with the keys on your person.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio

114

3-1. Key information
NOTICE

■ Handling the card keys
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.

Doing so may damage the card key.

● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card key

may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals.
(To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp it and pull.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are
turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the
electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other keyrelated problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the
card key, to your Lexus dealer.
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that
were provided with your vehicle.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

115

Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.

Locking and unlocking the doors from the outside
◆ Smart access system with push-button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the
doors.*

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part or lower part of
the handle) to lock the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.

◆ Wireless remote control
Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely
locked.
2

Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again unlocks the other doors.
Press and hold to open the windows
and moon roof.*
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Make sure to touch the sensor on the
back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (→P. 120)

116

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Operation signals

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof
are operating.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the
security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle
If the door will not lock even when the topside
sensor area is touched, try touching both the
topside and underside sensor areas at the same
time.

■ Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds
continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■ Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (→P. 77)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate properly
● Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (→P. 546)
● Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P. 503)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

117

Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside
◆ Door lock switches
1

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

◆ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door

Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handles even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
The other doors can be unlocked by
pulling the inside handles.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking the driver’s door from the outside without a key
1

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle when the lock is set.
1

Unlock

Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push
down on each rear door switch to lock
both rear doors.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

119

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 580.
Function

Operation

Shift position linked door lockShifting the shift lever out of P locks all the doors.
ing function
Shift position linked
unlocking function

door Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the doors.

Speed linked door locking All the doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
function
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver’s door linked door All the doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is
opened within 45 seconds after turning the engine
unlocking function
switch off.

Operation of each component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

120

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Changing the door unlock function setting

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold
for
approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2 .)

Multi-information
display

Unlocking function
Holding the driver’s door handle
unlocks only the driver’s door.
Holding a passenger’s door handle unlocks all the doors.

Beep

Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Interior: Pings once

Holding a door handle unlocks Exterior: Beeps twice
all the doors.
Interior: Pings once

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If
a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will be locked
again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 77)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

121

■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may
not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (→P. 546)
■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start
or wireless remote control
→P. 134
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)
WARNING

■ To prevent an accident

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant being thrown out of the
vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

122

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following procedures.

Locking and unlocking the back door
◆ Smart access system with push-button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
1

Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.

Unlocks all the doors
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.

◆ Wireless remote control
→P. 115

◆ Door lock switches
→P. 117

Opening/closing the back door with the wireless remote control
Press and hold the switch.
The power back door can be operated
even when the back door is locked.*
*: This setting can be customized so
that the power back door can be
operated only when the back door is
unlocked. (→P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

123

Opening/closing the back door from the inside
Press and hold the power back door
switch to open/close the back door.
Pressing the switch again while the
power back door is operating will cause
the operation to reverse.

Opening the back door from the outside
1

Open the upper back door

When the power back door is
locked: While carrying an electronic key, press and hold the back
door opener switch.
The upper back door will automatically* open.
*: Using the customization function, the upper back door can be set to not automatically
open, even when the back door opener switch is pressed. (→P. 580)
When the automatic open function is disabled, the upper back door can be opened
by lifting it up with the back door opener switch pressed and held.
2

Open the lower back door
Pull the handle.
The lower back door will open.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

When the power back door is
unlocked: Press the back door
opener switch.

124

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Power back door switch
Pressing the switch closes the upper
back door automatically. (A buzzer
sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the upper
back door is closing opens it again.

Canceling the power back door system
Turn the main switch off to disable the
power back door system.
1

Off
The back door cannot be operated even
with the wireless remote control or
power back door switch.

On
Orange mark on the switch should be
visible when the switch is on.

When closing the back door
● Make sure that the lower back door

is closed before closing the upper
back door.
● Lower the back door using the back
door handle, and make sure to push
the back door down from the outside to close it.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

125

Rear step bumper
The rear step bumper is for rear end
protection and easier step-up loading.

■ Power back door operating conditions

*2: The back door cannot be operated using the wireless remote control.
■ If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be operated from the inside.
1 Remove the cover on the back door trim.
Use a cloth to prevent scratches.

Push the lever for the back door motor,
open the back door.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

When the engine switch is off or in accessory mode, the power back door can be
opened and closed if the power back door main switch is on and all of the following conditions are met.
● The lower back door is closed (only when closing)*1
When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the power back door can be
opened and closed if the power back door main switch is on and all of the following conditions are met.*2
● The lower back door is closed (only when closing)*1
● The vehicle speed is below 1 mph (3 km/h) and the shift lever is in P
*1: If the lower back door is opened while the upper back door is in a closing operation,
it automatically opens again.

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Jam protection function

If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door will
automatically operate in the opposite direction.
■ When re-connecting the battery
To enable the power back door to operate properly, perform the following:
● Unlock the back door using the door lock switch
● Close the back door manually
■ Back door closer
In the event that the upper and lower back doors are left slightly open, the back door
closer will automatically close them to the fully closed position.
■ Fall-down protection function
While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will
stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from rapidly falling down.
■ Back door reserve lock function
This function is a function which reserves locking of all doors, beforehand, when the back
door is open. When the following procedure is performed, all the doors except the back
door are locked and then back door will also be locked at the same time it is closed.
1 Close all doors, except the back door.
2 Perform any of the following during the automatic closing operation of the back door.
• Press the lock button on the wireless remote control. (→P. 110)
• Touch the lock sensor on the side door handle with carrying the electronic key on
your person. (→P. 115)
Also, if the back door does not fully close due to the operation of the jam protection
function, etc., while the back door is automatically closing after a reserve lock operation is performed, the reserve lock function is canceled and all the doors will unlock.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. switch operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

127

WARNING
■ While driving
● Keep the back door closed while driving.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage may
be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health
hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back
door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat
exhaustion or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands,
head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

128

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING

■ Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it.
Failure to do so may cause the back door suddenly shut again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back
door is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move
abruptly in strong wind.
● The back door may suddenly shut if it is not

opened fully. It is more difficult to open or
close the back door on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the back door
unexpectedly opening or closing by itself.
Make sure that the back door is fully open and
secure before using the luggage compartment.

● When closing the back door, take extra care

to prevent your fingers etc. from being
caught. Also pay attention to your personal
belongings such as bags and ties.
● When closing the back door, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back
door handle is used to fully close the back
door, it may result in hands or arms being
caught.
● Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not hang on
the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, causing an accident.
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be
caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Lexus part is recommended.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

129

WARNING
■ Back door closer
● In the event that the upper or lower back door

is left slightly open, the back door closer will
automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the back
door closer begins to operate. Be careful not
to catch fingers or anything else in the back
door, as this may cause bone fractures or
other serious injuries.

door system is canceled.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

● Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power back

130

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING

■ Power back door

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back
door is about to open or close.
● If the power back door system is turned off with the main switch while the back door is
operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped. The back door then has
to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may
open or close unexpectedly.
● When the back door opener switch is pressed a second time during an automatic
open operation that was performed by pressing the back door opener switch, the
operation stops and the back door has to be operated manually. At this time, take
extra care, as the back door may open or close abruptly.
● If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound
and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated
manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.
● On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure the back
door is fully open and secure.
● In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.
• When the back door contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode or the engine is started during automatic operation
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the power back door
may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may suddenly shut again
after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When
installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Lexus part is recommended.
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that
is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

131

NOTICE
■ Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as

stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the
damper stay rod.
● Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves
or other fabric items.
● Do not attach any accessories other than
genuine Lexus parts to the back door.
● Do not place your hand on the damper stay or
apply lateral forces to it.

Damper stay

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power back door
● Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent

movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is
present on the back door may cause a malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operating.
● Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the
power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the
power back door will not operate in automatic operation.
■ When operating the back door reserve lock function
Make sure to carry the electronic key on your person.
If the electronic key is returned inside the vehicle during the closing operation, it may
be locked even if the electronic key is inside the vehicle depending on the location of
electronic key.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that all the doors are closed and locked.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

■ To prevent back door closer malfunction

132

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic
key on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always
carry the electronic key.
● Locks and unlocks the side doors (→P. 115)
● Locks and unlocks the back door (→P. 122)
● Starts the engine (→P. 205)
■ Antenna location
1
2
3

Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the luggage compartment

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

133

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the outside front door handle.
(Only the doors detecting the key can be
operated.)

Alarm

Situation

Correction procedure

Exterior
alarm An attempt was made to lock the Close all of the doors and
sounds once for 5 vehicle while a door is open
lock the doors again
seconds
The engine switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode while the
driver’s door was open (or the Turn the engine switch off
Interior alarm pings driver’s door was opened while and close the driver’s door
the engine switch was in ACCEScontinuously
SORY mode)
The engine switch was turned off
while the driver’s door was open Close the driver’s door

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting
from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.

134

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long
time.
● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take
some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside
of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case,
take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press

twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart
access system with push-button start cannot be
used. To cancel the function, press any of the
electronic key buttons.
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following
situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote
control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: →P. 546)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects
• Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication
device
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

135

● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system
may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover (if equipped) or floor,
or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch
modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets
when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be
detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the
outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or
unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used
to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine
if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range.
(The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors
are not opened and closed.)
● Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or
unlock operation.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near
the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be
shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction
procedures to wash the vehicle.
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take
care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with
push-button start. (→P. 134)

136

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car

wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will
sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc.
Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the
lower part of the door handle.
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to
unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped or back door unlock switch is
pressed.
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from
being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check
that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle.
● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
(→P. 580)
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the
vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not
be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off
accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 546)
● Starting the engine: →P. 547
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized
setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 115, 546)
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: →P. 547
● Stopping the engine: →P. 206

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

137

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start


For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico

Operation of each component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

138


3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
For vehicles sold in Canada

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

139

WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-

pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the
smart access system antennas. (→P. 132)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of
radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if
you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

Operation of each component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

140

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats
Adjustment procedure

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Lumber support adjustment switch

Seat cushion length adjustment switch (driver’s side only)

Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback during a
rear-end collision, the head restraint
moves slightly forward and upward to
help reduce the risk of whiplash on the
seat occupant.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

141

■ Power easy access system

The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with engine switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 151)
■ Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move. Pushing
up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head restraint inner structure. These
do not indicate problems.

During rear-end collision

Inner
structure

■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not

injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk
of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

WARNING

142

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Rear seats
Adjustment procedure


Second seats

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Seat position adjustment switch



Third seats (if equipped)

Seatback angle adjustment lever

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

143

Tumbling the second seats and third seat entry
For easy access to the third seat (if equipped), perform 1 in “Tumbling the second seats” (→P. 144).
■ Before tumbling the second seats
1

Stow the seat belt buckles and
lower the head restraints to the
lowest position.

Pass the outer seat belts through
the seat belt hangers and secure
the seat belt plates.
This prevents the shoulder belt from
being damaged.
Make sure that the seat belts are
removed from the hangers before
using them.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system: Install the display
cover for the rear seat entertainment system.
Pass the cover belt under the display and slide the cover up.

Slide the cover down from the top
of the display to cover it.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

144

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Tumbling the second seats
1

Fold down the seatback while
pulling the seatback angle adjustment lever, and swing the whole
seat up and forward.

Hook the holding strap to the
assist grip and secure the seat by
pulling its free end.
When returning the second seat to
its original position, stow the holding
strap.

Remove the seat hook covers
from the back of the seat cushion,
and install them on the seat
hooks.
When returning the second seat to
its original position, remove the seat
hook covers from the floor and install
them in the back of the seat cushion.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

145

Folding the third seats (if equipped)
■ Before folding the third seats

Stow the seat belts buckles.

Stow the center head restraint in the seatback. (→P. 157)

Stow the center seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof. (→P. 32)

■ Folding down the third seatback
1

For right side

For left side

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

146

3-3. Adjusting the seats

The seat will automatically fold when
the switch is pressed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

147

■ Folding up the third seats
1

Perform following steps in “Before folding the third seats”. (→P. 145)

If the switch is pressed and held,
the seat will automatically fold
and lift sideward. (The buzzer
sounds twice when the seat is
about to lift.)

Remove the seat hook covers
from the underside of the seat
cushion, and install them on the
seat hooks.

Operation of each component

If the switch is released while the seat
is lifting sideward, operation will stop
and a buzzer will sound continuously.
Before operating, make sure that the
handle on the rear of the seatback is
secure.

■ Returning the third seats
1

Remove the seat hook covers
from the floor and install them
into the underside of the seat
cushion.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

148

3-3. Adjusting the seats
2

If the switch is held down the seat
will automatically return to the
folding position. (Buzzer sounds
twice)
If the switch is released while returning to the folding position, operation
will stop and a buzzer will sound continuously.

Pull the handle and raise the seatbacks.
Fix the handle securely in its original
position after use.

Raise the head restraints.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

149

■ Alarms and indicators (vehicles with third seat)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sound.
Indicator light and buzzer

Situation

Correction procedure

Shift lever is not in the P
position with the engine
switch in IGNITION ON
Buzzer sounds for 10 secmode.
onds Indicator light on*
Stop the switch operation
during the automatic third
seat is in motion.
Indicator light flashes*

Move the shift lever in the
P position with the engine
switch in IGNITION ON
mode.
Return the third seat from a
halfway position to tumbling position or the origiThe seat movement is nal position with the third
stopped in a half way when seat return switch or third
seat tumbling switch.
the back door is opened.

Buzzer sounds for 10 seconds
Indicator
light The seat is not moved to
flashes*
the table mode from the
original position after 10
seconds the tumbling
switch is pressed.

Check something is
caught between the seat
cushion and seatback. If
nothing is caught, have the
system checked by your
Lexus dealer.

Buzzer sounds for 10 sec- Automatic closing operaonds Indicator light blinks tion is stopped because of Have the system checked
by your Lexus dealer.
slowly*
a system problem.
Any of the tumbling or
return switch is pushed
when shift lever is not in the
Indicator light flashes
P position with the engine
switch in IGNITION ON Move the shift lever in the
P position with the engine
mode.
switch in IGNITION ON
Table mode switch is mode.
pushed when shift lever is
Indicator light flashes 3 not in the P position with
times
the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode.

*: A warning will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Automatic tumbling or
return
operation
is Have the system checked
stopped because of a sys- by your Lexus dealer.
tem problem.

150

3-3. Adjusting the seats
WARNING

■ Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk
of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ When the seatback is folded
● Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback while driving.
● Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get burned when
they become hot.
■ When returning the seatbacks to their original position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
● Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
● Make sure the seats are securely locked. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt
from operating properly.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.
● Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.
■ Avoiding damage to seat components
Do not hang or attach anything on the seatback striker.
NOTICE
■ Before tumbling, folding up the seats

The seat belts and buckles must be stowed.
■ After returning the third seat (if equipped)

Make sure that the handle on the rear of the seatback has been secured.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

151

Driving position memory
This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seats, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to
suit your preferences.

Power easy access system
The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to
enter and exit the vehicle easily.

When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat and steering
wheel automatically return to their original positions.
• The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION
ON mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
■ Operation of the power easy access system

When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is
already close to the rearmost position, etc.
■ Customization
The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can be customized. (Customizable features: →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

When all of the following have been
performed, the driver’s seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to
a position that allows driver to enter
and exit the vehicle easily.
• The shift lever has been shifted to P.
• The engine switch has been turned
off.
• The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened.

152

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel,
outside rear view mirrors and HUD [head-up display] [if equipped]) can be
entered into the computer’s memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is
also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are
unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be recorded into memory.
■ Recording procedure
1

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and HUD
(head-up display) (if equipped) to the desired positions.

While pressing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pressed, press
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the
buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously recorded
position will be overwritten.

■ Recall procedure
1

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Press one of the buttons for the
driving position you want to recall
until the buzzer sounds.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

153

■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel
position recall).
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off
Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is
opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is erased when
the battery is disconnected.

Memory recall function (driver’s side only)
■ Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the
following:
Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded
properly.
1

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Recall the driving position that you want to record.

While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock
switch (either lock or unlock) until
the buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered,
the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Each electronic key can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.

154

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Recall procedure
1

Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position.
Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position,
and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart access system
with push-button start or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering
wheel and HUD [head-up display] [if equipped]). However, the seat will move to a
position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehicle
easier.
If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and
outside rear view mirrors will not move.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION ON mode,
or fasten a seat belt.
The seat, steering wheel and HUD (head-up display) (if equipped) will move to the
recorded position.

■ Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled
properly.
1

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the

driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart access system with
push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving
position button which has been set.
■ Customization
The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

155

Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front seats
Vertical adjustment
1

Up
Pull the head restraints up.

Down
Push the head restraint down while
pushing the lock release button.

Angle adjustment (if equipped)

Second seats
1

Up
Pull the head restraints up.

Down
Push the head restraint down while
pushing the lock release button.

Lock release button

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Lock release button

156

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Third outboard seats (if equipped)
To fold the head restraints, pull the head
restraint angle lever

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted
so that the center of the head restraint is closest
to the top of your ears.

■ Removing the head restraints


Front seats
Push a flathead screwdriver into the slot. The
slot is located on the right side of the right
head restraint anchor.

While pressing in the flathead screwdriver, pull up the head restraint.
Second seats
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock
release button.



Lock release button

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats
Third center seat (if equipped)
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock
release button.

157



Lock
release
button

Third outboard seats (if equipped)
The head restraint cannot be removed.
■ Installing the head restraints (except for the third outboard seats)
1 Align the head restraint with the installation holes.
2 Push down the head restraint to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
■ When not using the third center seat head restraint (if equipped)
Open the zipper on the back of the third seat
and stow the head restraint inside.


■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

WARNING

158

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
1

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

Horn
To sound the horn, press on or close to
the

mark.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

159

■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
engine switch mode.

■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory system. (→P. 151)
■ Power easy access system
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with engine switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 151)
WARNING

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

160

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Anti-glare function
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare function mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare function
is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each
time the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to
OFF mode. (The indicator also turns
off.)
■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do
not touch or cover them.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Indicator

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

161

WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.

Operation of each component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

162

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1

To select a mirror to adjust, press the
switch.
1

Left

Right
Pressing the same switch again will
put the switch in neutral.

To adjust the mirror, press the switch.
1

Right

Down

Left

Automatically folding and extending the mirrors
■ Using the switch

Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to extend them to the
original position.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

163

■ Setting automatic mode

Automatic mode allows the folding or extending of the mirrors to be linked to
locking/unlocking of the doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set automatic mode.
The indicator will come on.
Pressing the switch once more will
return to manual mode.

Indicator

Linked mirror function when reversing

To disable this function, select neither “L” nor “R”.
■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing

With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position. The
adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the
memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the
rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P. 405)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory. (→P. 151)
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (→P. 160)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear
view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in
order to give a better view of the ground.

164

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

■ Using automatic mode in cold weather

When automatic mode is used in cold weather, the door mirror could freeze up and
automatic stowing and return may not be possible. In this event, remove any ice and snow
from the door mirror, then either operate the mirror using manual mode or move the mirror by hand.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught
by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
NOTICE
■ If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the
mirror.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

165

Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1

Closing

One-touch closing*

Opening

One-touch opening*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the

switch in the opposite direction.

Operation of each component

Window lock switch
Press the switch to lock the passenger
window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children from
accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

Indicator

■ The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be
operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening,
window movement is stopped.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

166

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ When the window cannot be opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and
the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the
power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 seconds of
the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening
direction so that the door window can be opened and closed.
● If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above
operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the door window.
3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the
one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After
the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional
1 second or more.
5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the
one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or
more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again.
After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected
by your Lexus dealer.
■ When the battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the battery.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (→P. 546)
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P. 115)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
power windows open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

167

WARNING

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation
for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do
not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P. 165)
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power
windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also, do
not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is
possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the
window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.
● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught
in the window.

168

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and
down.

Opening and closing
Opens the moon roof*

The moon roof stops slightly before the
fully open position to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully open the
moon roof.
2

Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly

press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Tilting up and down
Tilts the moon roof up*

1
2

Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly

press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

169

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

■ If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically

Keep the switch depressed.
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
1 Stop the vehicle.
2

Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, re-open and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then
it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down,
open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either
front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key*. (→P. 546)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control*. (→P. 115)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

170

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position
and stops.
3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
1

*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch,
and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt
down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument panel when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
moon roof open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

171

WARNING

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of each component

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is
moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts
caught in the moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon
roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of
any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let
a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
moon roof fully closes.

172

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

173

Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle...................... 174
Cargo and luggage....................182
Vehicle load limits.......................186
Trailer towing................................ 187
Dinghy towing .............................204
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch .......... 205
Automatic transmission............210
Turn signal lever........................... 217
Parking brake ...............................218
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.......................... 221
Automatic High Beam .............224
Fog light switch ...........................229
Windshield wipers and
washer........................................... 231
Rear window wiper and
washer..........................................235
Headlight cleaner switch ....... 238
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap......239

4
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Lexus Safety System+ .............. 242
PCS (Pre-Collision
System)........................................249
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)..............................................261
Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed
range ............................................269
Cruise control .............................. 281
Driving mode select
switch ...........................................284
Intuitive parking assist..............287
4-Wheel AHC (Active
Height Control
Suspension)...............................295
Four-wheel drive system ........303
Crawl Control (with Turn
Assist function).........................307
Multi-terrain Select.................... 312
Multi-terrain Monitor................ 316
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....363
• BSM function......................... 367
• RCTA function........................371
Driving assist systems .............. 377
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.....................382
Off-road precautions...............386

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

174

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the engine
→P. 205

Driving
1

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 210)

Release the parking brake. (→P. 219)
If the parking brake is in automatic mode, the parking brake is released automatically
when shifting the shift lever to any position other than P. (→P. 218)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal
to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping
1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or
N. (→P. 210)

Parking the vehicle
1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake (→P. 219), and shift the shift lever to P (→P. 210).

Press the engine switch to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

175

Starting off on a steep uphill
1

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 210)

Pull the parking brake switch and parking brake is set manually. (→P. 219)

Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Press the parking brake switch and parking brake is released manually.
(→P. 219)

■ When starting off on a uphill

The hill-start assist control is available. (→P. 377)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may

become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slip-

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

pery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may
be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and
brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due
to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When the brake pedal is depressed
■ Restraining engine output (Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine
output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is
operating. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

176

4-1. Before driving

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer, perform the bedding-down operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (→P. 560)
■ When turning off the engine
Emission system operating sounds may continue for a short time after the engine is
turned off. This is not a malfunction, and helps to ensure optimal performance of the
emission system.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

177

WARNING

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This
prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only
slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using
your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving
will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems
will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over
and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way: →P. 511
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep
hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 210)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear
view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires.
Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle
are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
● When crossing rivers, turn off height control after putting the vehicle height in high
mode, and drive at 18 mph (30 km/h) or less. Otherwise the vehicle height may
change due to the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident. (→P. 295)

178

4-1. Before driving
WARNING

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your
ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed
could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the
brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly,
steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll
forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from
the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the
shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of
the vehicle that may cause an accident.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those
of the brake discs are exceeded.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

179

WARNING

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing
the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if
combustible material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle
when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the
vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as
the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the
seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers
such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized
film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a
lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the
vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the
vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

180

4-1. Before driving
WARNING

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on/off,
the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move
regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer
sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P.
You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the
transfer mode. (→P. 303)
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not
securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still
possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the
braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails,
the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more
firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is
stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

181

NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as

this may restrain the engine output.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the

same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is
accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging
the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (→P. 532)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have
your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
transfer, differentials, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

182

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) − (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ⎯
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P. 186)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

183

Calculation formula for your vehicle
1

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity
weight) (→P. 558)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle,
which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) − A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on,
the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) − D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)

*4: D = Additional weight of people
*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo
and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight
due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of
occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

*1: A = Weight of people
*2: B = Total load capacity
*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load

184

4-1. Before driving
WARNING

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the
driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing
an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
● Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover (if equipped)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• On the auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind
the front seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration
of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

185

WARNING
■ Roof luggage carrier precautions (if equipped)

NOTICE
■ Cross rail adjustment (if equipped)

Do not remove the cross rail stoppers, or the moon roof may be damage when it is
tilted.
■ When loading the luggage
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or more
genuine Lexus cross rails or their equivalent.
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear
axles.
● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width.
(→P. 558)
● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity
higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure
to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.
● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now
and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
● Do not exceed 154 lb. (70 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
■ Cross rail adjustment (if equipped)
Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward them.
Failure to do so may cause an accident or serious injury in the event of emergency
braking or a collision.

186

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR (Trailer
Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 558
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

◆ Seating capacity:

Vehicles with third seats: 8 occupants (Front 2, Rear 6)
Vehicles without third seats: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated
average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): →P. 191, 558
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

◆ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the
number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 495)
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability,
resulting in an accident.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

187

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle.
Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others,
you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you
are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been
installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance
with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional requirements such as towing kits, etc.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a
trailer for commercial purposes.

188

4-1. Before driving

Towing related terms
■ GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total
vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and
the weight of the trailer being towed
(including the cargo in the trailer).
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight
is the total weight of the vehicle.
When towing a trailer, it is the sum of
the vehicle weight (including the
occupants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehicle)
and the tongue weight.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

189

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross axle
weight. The gross axle weight is the
load placed on each axle (front and
rear).

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

(With brakes)

TWR is calculated assuming base
vehicle with one driver, one front
passenger, towing package (if available), hitch and hitch systems (if
required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the
trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds 3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended to use a
trailer with 2 or more axles.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

The maximum allowable gross trailer
weight. The gross trailer weight is
the sum of the trailer weight and the
weight of the cargo in the trailer.

190

4-1. Before driving

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for towing a
trailer without a trailer service brake
system.

■ Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer hitch
ball. (→P. 192)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

(Without brakes)

4-1. Before driving

191

Weight limits
● The gross trailer weight must never exceed 7000 lb. (3175 kg).
● The gross combination weight must never exceed 13400 lb. (6078 kg).
● The gross vehicle weight must never

exceed the GVWR indicated on the
Certification Label.
● The gross axle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.

● If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are

required.

● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with

GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle
weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.
■ GCWR*

13400 lb. (6078 kg)
■ TWR*

7000 lb. (3175 kg)
■ Unbraked TWR*

1000 lb. (454 kg)

*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE
J2807.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

sufficient capacity is required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing
hitch with sufficient capacity is required.

192

4-1. Before driving

Trailer Tongue Weight
● A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers

or towing as described below.
● To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded
by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is
9 % to 11 %. (Tongue weight/Gross trailer weight × 100 = 9 % to 11 %)
1

Gross trailer weight

Tongue weight

If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle to the
same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front fender
height above the front axle before connection. Adjust weight distributing
hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building
supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

193

Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Lexus recommends the
use of Lexus hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Lexus
dealer.
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your
vehicle.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing
the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any
substances into the vehicle.

Removing hitch cover
Remove the clip.

Grasp the lower edge of the hitch
cover and raise the cover.

Driving

When reattaching the cover, reverse the
steps listed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

194

4-1. Before driving

Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
1

Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross trailer
weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer coupler.
Most couplers are stamped with the
required trailer ball size.

Trailer class

Typical trailer ball size

2 5/16 in.

II and III

2 in.

1 7/8 in.

Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2 threads.

Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

195

Positions for towing hitch receiver
1

Hitch receiver pin hole position:
45.3 in. (1151 mm)

Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in the rear
end under the vehicle body.
4

Driving

Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation
may cause damage to the vehicle’s lights. Please take care to comply with your
state’s laws when installing trailer lights.
■ Service connector for towing brake controller

Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake controller. Please
consult your dealer when installing trailer brake systems to the vehicle.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

196

4-1. Before driving

Connecting and disconnecting a trailer
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:
● Connecting a trailer
1

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode.

Turn off the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Connect a trailer.

Turn on the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Select the N (normal) mode with the height select switch.
When a vehicle loaded with four occupants tows a trailer of about 4000 lb.
(1800 kg) with more than about 400 lb. (180 kg) tongue load, the normal mode
may not be selected. However, there is no problem to continue normal driving.
Drive with sufficient care because of large load.

● Disconnecting a trailer
1

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make sure the vehicle
height is in the “LO” mode by pulling the switch to “∨” on the height select
switch.)

Turn off the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 4 in.
(100 mm).

Turn on the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is lowered by the
automatic leveling function.

Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch higher and
repeat steps 2 through 5.

Move the vehicle forward in the “LO” mode where the hitch does not touch
anything in the N (normal) mode.

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the N mode.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

197

Trailer towing tips

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:
● Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the
posted towing speed limit.
● Lexus recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104 km/h)
on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed
limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination
(trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause
loss of control.
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area
away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicletrailer combination.
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the
bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the
trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right.
(This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp
or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the
risk of an accident.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least
one vehicle and trailer length.
● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and
loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

198

4-1. Before driving

● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a turn.
● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle

●

wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal
turning radius.
Slow down before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery surfaces,
etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be
sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance
when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in D.
If in the S mode, the transmission shift range position must be in 6 or lower.
(→P. 210)
Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill
grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden
downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking
efficiency.
Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot
days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep
grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and
stop in a safe spot. (→P. 552)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

199

● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s wheels

when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P.
Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the
following:

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and trailer’s
wheels.

When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.

Shift into P and apply the parking brake.

Turn off the engine.
● When restarting after parking on a slope:
5

With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal
pressed.

Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.

If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake.
(→P. 219)

Release the brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel
blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

Have someone retrieve the blocks.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

200

4-1. Before driving

■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a
more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup
must be the proper height for the coupler on the
trailer.

1
2

Coupler
Trailer ball

■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 565)
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.
● All trailer lights work as required by law.
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

201

■ Driving mode select switch

The suspension can be switched for improvement in driveability. (→P. 284)
■ Break-in schedule

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an
engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Lexus recommends that you do not
tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing.
However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than
50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles
(1000 km) of trailer towing.
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely
affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce
speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer
should stabilize.
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond
the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

202

4-1. Before driving
WARNING

■ Trailer towing precautions
● To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the

trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are
affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle
will handle differently when towing a trailer.
● Set the vehicle height to the “LO” mode and turn off the 4-Wheel AHC when you
connect a trailer, otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function, and you may catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident. (→P. 295)
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing hitch with
sufficient capacity is required.
● Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close
to the trailer axle as possible.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit
for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Slow
down sufficiently before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery surface, etc.
to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing
a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the
speed of which you experience the instability.
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of
vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
● Do not use cruise control (if equipped) or dynamic radar cruise control with fullspeed range (if equipped) when trailer towing.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not
make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long down hills. Before descending
steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal
down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to
overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

203

WARNING
■ Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight,
the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch.
Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause
an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.
■ When towing a trailer
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Lexus
recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking
effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer
and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of
the trailer wandering into another lane.

■ When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer
hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your
vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

NOTICE

204

4-1. Before driving

Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground)
behind a motor home.

NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

205

Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your
person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.

Starting the engine
1

Pull the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P. 218)
Parking brake indicator will come on.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.

When operating the engine switch, one
short, firm press is enough.
It is not necessary to press and hold the
switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for
up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from any
engine switch mode.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Press the engine switch shortly and
firmly.

206

4-2. Driving procedures

Stopping the engine
1

Stop the vehicle.

Set the parking brake (→P. 219), and shift the shift lever to P.

Press the engine switch.

Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instrument cluster is
off.

Changing engine switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake pedal released.
(The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*

The emergency flashers can be used.
2

ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the
audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other than
P when turning off the engine, the
engine switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

207

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the engine
switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:
1

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” is displayed on the multi-information display
and then press the engine switch once.

Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” on the multi-information display is off.

■ Auto power off function

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION ON
mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery
discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
■ Operation of the engine switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change
or the engine may not start.
● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the
engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 112
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 134
■ Note for the entry function
→P. 135
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 75)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is
displaced out of P.
A message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Steering lock
After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel
will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

208

4-2. Driving procedures

■ When the steering lock cannot be released

A message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the
engine switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the
engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from
running the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■ When “Smart Access System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the
multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer,
immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 503
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized
setting
→P. 546
WARNING
■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until
the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
● If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and
hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in
succession. (→P. 511)
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but
the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer
and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
● If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be
shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.
● When restarting the engine after it was turned off while driving, shift the shift lever to
N and press the engine switch.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

209

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long

periods of time without the engine running.

● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the multi-information display,

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

the engine switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the engine
switch is off.
● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is
stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but
instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY
mode, battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the
switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

210

4-2. Driving procedures

Automatic transmission
Shifting the shift lever

While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever
with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is
completely stopped.

Shift position purpose
Shift position

Purpose and condition

Parking the vehicle/starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)

Normal driving*1 or temporary shift range selection driving*2

S mode driving*3 (→P. 213)

*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving
conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal driving.

*2: If equipped, by selecting shift ranges using paddle shift switches, you can control
engine braking forces.

: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear
ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

211

Selecting the second start mode
Use second start mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces
such as snow.
Press the button to use second start
mode.
Press the button again to cancel second
start mode.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

212

4-2. Driving procedures

Changing shift range in D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle shift
switch.
When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be downshifted
to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions.
When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be one gear
upper than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest shift range, preventing
unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be
selected.
1

Downshifting

Upshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to
D8, will be displayed in the meter.
To return to normal D position driving, the “+” paddle shift switch must
be held down for a period of time.

Meter display

Function

D2-D8

A gear in the range between 1 and the selected gear is automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving
conditions

Setting the gear at 1

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

213

Changing shift ranges in S mode
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever or paddle shift switches can
be operated as follows:
1

Upshifting

Downshifting

The selected shift range, from 1 to 8,
will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is set
automatically to 6, 5 or 4 according to
vehicle speed. However, the initial shift
range may be set to 3 or 2 if AI-SHIFT
has operated while the shift lever was in
the D position. (→P. 214)
4

Driving

■ Shift ranges and their functions
● Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 8 according to vehicle speed

and driving conditions. But, the gear is limited according to selected shift
range.
● You can choose from 8 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher
shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

214

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Paddle shift switches (if equipped)
● When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will be auto-

matically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear lower than
the gear in use during normal D position driving.
● Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
• When the vehicle comes to a stop
• If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer than a certain period of time in one
shift range
■ Driving on a downhill
On declines, there may be case where the vehicle shifts down automatically to obtain
engine braking. As a result of the downshifting, the engine speed may increase.
■ Second start mode automatic deactivation
Second start mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off after driving in
second start mode.
■ S mode
When the shift range is 7 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to
8.
■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and
driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the
shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
■ When driving with cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking,
engine braking will not activate because cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range will not be canceled.
● While driving in D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches) or S mode, downshifting to 7, 6, 5 or 4. (→P. 269, 281)
● When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position. (→P. 284)
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode and the brake pedal is being depressed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

215

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer, immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever
can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
1 Set the parking brake.
2 Turn the engine switch off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver
or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip
of the screwdriver with a rag.
4
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button
is pressed.

■ If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever
is in D.)
■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes
be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the
shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

216

4-2. Driving procedures
WARNING

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an
accident.
■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and
depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the
shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle
may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

217

Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of the driver:
1

Right turn

Lane change to the right (move the
lever partway and then release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and then release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

Left turn
4

Driving

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change
Operate the lever in the opposite direction
■ Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

218

4-2. Driving procedures

Parking brake
A selections can be made as desired from the following modes.

Automatic mode
The parking brake is set or released automatically according to shift lever operation.
Even when in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set and released manually. (→P. 219)
■ Turns automatic mode on

While the vehicle is stopped, pull
and hold the parking brake switch
until a message is shown on the
multi-information display
• When the shift lever is moved out of
P, the parking brake will be released,
and the parking brake indicator light
turn off.
• When the shift lever is moved into P,
the parking brake will be set, and the
parking brake indicator light turn on.
Operate the shift lever with the brake
pedal depressed.
■ Turns automatic mode off

While the vehicle is stopped, press
and hold the parking brake switch
until a message is shown on the
multi-information display

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

U.S.A. Canada

4-2. Driving procedures

219

Manual mode
1

Sets the parking brake
The parking brake indicator light will
come on. (→P. 219)
Pull and hold the parking brake switch if
an emergency occurs and it is necessary
to operate the parking brake while driving.

U.S.A. Canada

Releases the parking brake
Operate the parking brake switch while
depressing the brake pedal. Make sure
that the parking brake indicator light
goes off.

■ Parking the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

→P. 174
■ Parking brake operation
● When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, the parking brake cannot be
released using the parking brake switch.
● When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, automatic mode (automatic
brake setting and releasing) is not available.
■ If “Parking Brake Overheated Parking Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multiinformation display
If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may
restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Parking brake indicator light
● Depending on the engine switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will come on
and stay on as described below:
IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
● When the engine switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Changing the mode
When changing the automatic mode on/off, the message will be shown on the multiinformation display and the buzzer sounds.
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. “Release
Parking Brake” is displayed on the multi-information display.

220

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information
display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ If the brake system warning light comes on
→P. 522
■ Usage in winter time
→P. 382
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P and make
sure that the vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunctions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

221

Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, instrument
panel lights, and daytime
running lights (→P. 222)
turn on.

The headlights, daytime
running lights (→P. 222)
and all lights listed above
turn on and off automatically. (When the engine
switch is in IGNITION
ON mode.)

Off

4
(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

The daytime running lights
turn on. (→P. 222)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

(Canada)

Driving

The headlights and all
lights listed above (except
daytime running lights)
turn on.

(U.S.A.)

222

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning on the high beam headlights
1

With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center position
to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on
or off.

■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illu-

minate brighter than the parking lights.

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime

running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The
daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the
(Canada only),
or “AUTO”* position
*: When the surroundings are bright

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is
set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater
durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything that
blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

223

■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

door is opened and closed if the engine switch has been switched to ACCESSORY or
off mode.
● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch
is switched to ACCESSORY or off mode and driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the
light switch off once and then back to
or
position.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.
■ Welcome lighting
If the headlight switch is turned to
and the surrounding area is dark, unlocking the
doors using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control
will turn the parking lights and tail lights on automatically.
■ If the automatic headlight leveling system warning light flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode
and the driver’ door is opened while the tail lights remain on.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)

224

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the
brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles ahead etc., and automatically
turns the high beam on or off as necessary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system

Vehicles without PCS (Pre-Collision System):
Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.



● Do not touch the camera sensor.
● Do not subject the inside rear view mirror or

the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not spill liquid onto the inside rear view
mirror or the camera sensor.
● Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the
camera sensor or the area of windshield near
the camera sensor.
● Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor will

mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of other vehicles, etc.
● Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the inside rear
view mirror and the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the vehicle.
● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not replace headlights with non-genuine headlights.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
 Vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System): →P. 245

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

225

Activating the Automatic High Beam system
1

Push the lever away from you with
the headlight switch in the
or
position.

Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will
come on when the headlights are turned
on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

226

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning the high beam on/off manually
■ Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to the original position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

■ Switching to high beam

Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
● When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically

turned on:
• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned
off:
• Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

227

■ Camera sensor detection information
● The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or
roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road
• When vehicles ahead have no lights
● The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without using
the headlights is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause
the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high beam on or
off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage
● The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.
● Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.
● In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high
beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles ahead or other parties. In these
cases, manually switch between the high and low beams.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color,
or are not aimed properly.
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with
rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.
• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.
• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck.
• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.
• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner.
• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other
drivers or pedestrians nearby.

228

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Temporary lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
 Vehicles without PCS (Pre-Collision System):
To lower the sensitivity, push and hold
on the inside rear view mirror for 15 to 20 seconds, and release. The indicator light on the inside rear view mirror will flash to indicate
that the sensitivity has been lowered.
When the engine switch is turned off, the sensitivity will be returned to its normal level.
 Vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System):
1 Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
• The headlight switch is in
.
• The headlight switch lever is in low beam position.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3 Within 30 seconds after 2 , repeat pushing the headlight switch lever to the high
beam position then pulling it to the low beam position quickly 10 times, then leave
the lever in high beam position.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

229

Fog light switch
The fog lights assist visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or
fog.


Type A

Turns the fog lights off

Turns the fog lights on

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

230


4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type B

Turns the fog lights off

Turns the fog lights on

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

231

Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.


Type A

Temporary operation

Rain-sensing operation (“AUTO”)

Low speed operation

High speed operation
When “AUTO” is selected, the wipers
will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Driving

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when “AUTO” is selected.
5

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

232
7

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers operate automatically. (After
operating several times, the wipers
operate one more time after a short
delay to prevent dripping.)



Type B

Temporary operation

Rain-sensing operation (“AUTO”)

Low speed operation

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

233

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when “AUTO” is selected.
5

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers operate automatically. (After
operating several times, the wipers
operate one more time after a short
delay to prevent dripping.)
4

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Raindrop sensor
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of

raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or
setting of the sun intermittently strikes the
windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the
windshield.

● If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the engine switch is in

IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that “AUTO” mode is activated.
● When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in “AUTO” mode, the wipers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitivity is enhanced.
● If the temperature of the rain drop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F (-30°C)
or lower, the automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any
mode other than “AUTO”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

234

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers etc. anything
else does not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The
fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and
held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

235

Rear window wiper and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:


Type A

Intermittent window wiper operation

Normal window wiper operation

Driving

Washer/wiper dual operation

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

236

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers



Type B

Intermittent window wiper operation

Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

237

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If no washer fluid sprays

NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid
reservoir.
■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time
after a short delay to prevent dripping.
■ Effect of vehicle and shift position on wiper operation
 Type A
With
or
selected, the rear window wiper sweeps once when you shift the
shift lever to R while windshield wipers operating or with 17 seconds from their deactivation.
 Type B
With
or
selected, the rear window wiper sweeps once when you shift the
shift lever to R while windshield wipers operating or with 17 seconds from their deactivation.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 580)

238

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight cleaner switch∗
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the headlights.

■ The headlight cleaners can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-4. Refueling

239

Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

Before refueling the vehicle
● Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are

closed.
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types

→P. 566
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

WARNING
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal
surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity
before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors
to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the
sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel
may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

■ When refueling the vehicle

240

4-4. Refueling
NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap
1

Pull the lever.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and
remove it, then put it into the holder
on the fuel filler door.

Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap
until you hear a click. Once the cap is
released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-4. Refueling

241

WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing
so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System+∗
The Lexus Safety System+ consists of the following drive assist systems and
contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗
→P. 249

◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)∗
→P. 261

◆ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range∗
→P. 269

◆ Automatic High Beam
→P. 224
WARNING
■ Lexus Safety System+

The Lexus Safety System+ is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver
will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the
vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that
this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

Vehicle data recording
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will
record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking
function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating)
The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the
inside of the vehicle.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
● Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Sensors
Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
1

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
Radar sensor
Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the front or
back of the front grille emblem is dirty or
covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean
it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark
or damage them.

● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to

the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

245

WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc.,
clear the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use
the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, etc., and so forth, to the outer
side of the windshield in front of the camera
sensor (shaded area in the illustration).
A: From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the
camera sensor
B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approximately 4.0 in. (10 cm) to the right and left
from the center of the camera sensor)
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with
condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or
ice. (→P. 399)
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper
blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the
lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor (inside rear

view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front
grille or front bumper. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will
not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

247

■ Certification

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗
The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect
vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle. When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a
warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential
brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system
determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the
collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can
be changed. (→P. 253)
4

Driving

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that
the possibility of a frontal collision is
high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.

◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake
pedal is depressed.

◆ Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help
avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.

◆ Suspension control
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (→P. 377) will control the damping
force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

251

WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any
circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or
injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of
the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore
the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always
drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision: →P. 255
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P. 257
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system
may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force
will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the precollision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.
Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive
action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of
the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the
steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive
action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking
function.

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to
rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or
speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident
or other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been
in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is
temporarily installed to the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

253

Changing settings of the pre-collision system
■ Disabling the pre-collision system

Press the PCS switch for 3 seconds or
more.
The PCS warning light will turn on
and a message will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
To enable the system, press the PCS
switch again.
The system is enabled each time the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing

The operation timing setting is
retained when the engine switch is
turned off.
1

Far
The warning will begin to operate
earlier than with the default timing.

Middle
This is the default setting.

Near
The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Press the PCS switch to display the
current warning timing on the multiinformation display. Each time the
PCS switch is pressed with the
warning timing displayed, the warning timing will change as follows.

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following speeds:
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10
and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph
[30 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10
and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has
not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)
● If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning
function will be operational)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

255

■ Pedestrian detection function

The pre-collision system detects pedestrians
based on the size, profile, and motion of a
detected object. However, a pedestrian may not
be detected depending on the surrounding
brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of
the detected object, preventing the system from
operating properly. (→P. 259)

■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming
lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will
be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that
is making a left/right turn

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent
lane may change, such as on a winding
road

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is
uneven or undulating
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or
walls
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or
object by the roadside at the entrance of a
curve

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on
an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion
on the road surface or roadside
• When a crossing pedestrian approaches
very close to the vehicle

• When passing through a place with a low
structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic
sign, etc.)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

257

• When passing under an object (billboard,
etc.) at the top of an uphill road

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other
barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When driving through or under objects
that may contact the vehicle, such as thick
grass, tree branches, or a banner

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a
vehicle or pedestrian
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other
location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance

•
•
•
•

If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle
If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front
of your vehicle

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
When driving through steam or smoke
When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such
as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines
directly into the camera sensor
When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a
tunnel
After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of
time
While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
If your vehicle is skidding
If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

If the wheels are misaligned
If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
The vehicle is wobbling.
The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

259

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained,
preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and
camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately
6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part
of their body
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• Groups of pedestrians which are close together
• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as
their surroundings
• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road
• Pedestrians who are walking fast
• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view
mirror, etc.)

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is displayed on

the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction
in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and
the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot,
such as in the sun
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold,
such as in an extremely cold environment
• When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →P. 405)
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is
attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (→P. 378), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking
functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-collision Brake System
Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

261

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)∗
Summary of functions
When driving on roads with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the driver
when the vehicle might depart from its lane.
The LDA system recognizes visible
white (yellow) lines with the camera
sensor on the upper portion of the front
windshield.

Functions included in LDA system

Driving

◆ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that
the vehicle might depart from its
lane, a warning is displayed on the
multi-information display, and either
the warning buzzer sounds or the
steering wheel vibrates to alert the
driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds or
the steering wheel vibrates, check
the surrounding road situation and
carefully operate the steering wheel
to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ Vehicle sway warning
When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from its
lane multiple times, the warning
buzzer sounds and a message is displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

WARNING
■ Before using LDA system

Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not automatically drive
the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of
the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to
correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when
fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LDA system by mistake
When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

263

WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system

Turning LDA system on
Press the LDA switch to turn the LDA
system on.
The LDA indicator illuminates.
Press the LDA switch again to turn the
LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on or
off, operation of the LDA system continues in the same condition the next time
the engine is started.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the
side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard
(bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Indications on multi-information display
Lane departure alert function display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving
assist system information screen.



Inside of displayed white lines is
white

Indicates that the system is recognizing
white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle
departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs
from flashes orange.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)



Inside of displayed white lines is
black

Indicates that the system is not able to
recognize white (yellow) lines or is
temporarily canceled.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

265

■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LDA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more
than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 267)
● Vehicle sway warning
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in
(Settings display) of the multi-information display is set to “On”. (→P. 580)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 267)
■ Temporary cancelation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled.
However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (→P. 265)
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc.
■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be
recognized.

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate
or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones
are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are
white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the
entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire
pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis
has deviated.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

267

■ Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the
LDA indicator turns off, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Details/Actions

“Lane Departure
Alert
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer”

The system may not be operating properly.
→ Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer.

“Forward Camera
System
Unavailable
Clean Windshield”

Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc. are
present on the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LDA system off, remove any dirt,
rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc. from the
windshield, and then turn the LDA system
back on.

“Forward Camera
System
Unavailable”

The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met.
→ When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the
LDA system will become available. Turn
the LDA system off, wait for a little while,
and then turn the LDA system back on.

The LDA system is temporarily canceled due
to a malfunction in a sensor other than the
camera sensor.
→ Turn the LDA system off and follow the
“Lane Departure Alert Unavailable”
appropriate troubleshooting procedures
for the warning message. Afterward, drive
the vehicle for a short time, and then turn
the LDA system back on.
“Lane Departure
Alert
Unavailable
Below Approx
32 mph”

The LDA system cannot be used as the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h).
→ Drive the vehicle at approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.

If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Warning message

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Customization

The following settings can be changed.
Function
Lane departure alert function
Vehicle sway warning function
For how to change settings, refer to P. 580.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Setting details
Adjust alert sensitivity
Adjust alert type
Turn function on and off
Adjust alert sensitivity

4-5. Using the driving support systems

269

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed
range∗
Summary of functions
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle
even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode,
the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and
highways.
● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (→P. 272)
● Constant speed control mode (→P. 277)
Indicators

Display

Set speed

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch

Cruise control switch

Driving

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system,
and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to
reduce the driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions,
weather conditions, etc.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as
detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive
safely. Relying on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can
lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided
by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the
driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a
designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine
whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range has limited capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any
danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act
appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range off using the “ON/OFF”
button when not in use.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

271

WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following
situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from
detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sensor
● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle
following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from
the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill
slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system
applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to
changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot
decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by
system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pushing the cruise control lever up
or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.

Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set
speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

273

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
1

Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will come
on and a message will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
If the “ON/OFF” button is pressed and
held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system
turns on in constant speed control
mode. (→P. 277)

Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
If the lever is operated while the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50
km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present, the set speed will be adjusted to approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.
1

Increases the speed
(Except when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control in vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode)

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or
down to change the speed, and release
when the desired speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased
or decreased as follows:


For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2
increments for as long as the lever is held
 For vehicles sold in Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)*2
increments for as long as the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (→P. 277), the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is held.

*1:
*2 :

When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

275

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1

Long

Medium

Short

Preceding
vehicle mark

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set
automatically to long mode when the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Distance options

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Medium

Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Short

Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
After the vehicle ahead of you starts off,
push the lever up.
Your vehicle will also resume follow-up
cruising if the accelerator pedal is
depressed after the vehicle ahead of
you starts off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is
stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Canceling and resuming the speed control
1

Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled when
the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been stopped by
system control, depressing the brake
pedal does not cancel the setting.)

Pushing the lever up resumes the
cruise control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected, cruise control does not resume when
the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
When your vehicle is too close to a
vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic
deceleration via the cruise control is
not possible, the display will flash and
the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another
driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicleto-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-tovehicle distance is small.
● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle
speed
● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● When depressing the accelerator pedal

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

277

Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set
speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only
when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due
to a dirty radar sensor, etc.
1

With the cruise control off, press and
hold the “ON/OFF” button for 1.5
seconds or more.
Immediately after the “ON/OFF” button is pressed, the radar cruise control
indicator will come on. Afterwards, it
switches to the cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control
mode is only possible when operating
the lever with the cruise control off.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: →P. 274
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P. 276

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 25 mph [40 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch (vehicles with

paddle shift switches).

● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

However, when a preceding vehicle is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range can be set even if the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph
(50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the
set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising
● Pushing the lever up while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the
vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the lever is pushed up.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are no
vehicles ahead.
● The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed
at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor can not properly
detect the vehicle. (“CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE No Preceding Vehicles” is displayed
on the multi-information display)
● VSC is activated.
● Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.
● When second start mode is set.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes
● The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center differential
lock switch has been operated.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

279

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of

the sensor

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center differential
lock switch has been operated.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may
be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal
when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach
warning (→P. 276) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards

(caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high

ground clearance

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function

correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal,
depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not
operate properly.
● When the road curves or when the lanes are
narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your posi-

tion in the lane is unstable

● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

281

Cruise control∗
Summary of functions
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1

Indicators

Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Driving

Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, and push the
lever down to set the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.
1

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the
lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the
desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the
lever is released.
*1: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

*2: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1

Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when
the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the
constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 25
mph (40 km/h).

■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift. (vehicles with paddle

shift switches)

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accel-

erating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new
speed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

283

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center differential
lock switch has been operated.
● When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.
■ If “Cruise Control Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is shown on the multi-information
display
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button
again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after
being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

WARNING
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

Normal mode/Customized mode
Normal mode and customized mode are selected by pressing the driving
mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode
changes between normal mode and customized mode. When customized
mode is selected, the “CUSTOMIZE” indicator will be illuminated.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when not in normal
mode.

• Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance. Suitable for city driving.
• Customized mode
Allows you to drive with the following functions set to your preferred settings.
Customized mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode customization display of the Remote touch screen. (→P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Function

285

Setting
Normal

Powertrain

Power
Eco

Chassis
Air conditioning system
2

Normal
Sport
Normal
Eco

Comfort mode
By controlling the suspension, riding comfort is further enhanced. Suitable for
city driving.
When not in comfort mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the
“COMFORT” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel economy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
When in comfort mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the
“ECO” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

Sport mode
• SPORT S mode
Controls the transmission and engine to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This mode is suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such
as when driving on roads with many curves.
When not in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the
right, the “SPORT S” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

• SPORT S+ mode
Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the transmission and engine. Suitable for sportier driving.
When in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,
the “SPORT S+” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. To improve air conditioning performance,
adjust the fan speed or turn off eco mode of the air conditioning system. (→P. 399)
■ Automatic deactivation of sport mode and customized mode
If the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or customized mode, the
drive mode will be changed to normal mode.
■ Driving mode pop-up display
When the driving mode is changed, the selected driving mode will be temporarily displayed on the side display. (→P. 392)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

287

Intuitive parking assist
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via
the multi-information display, the remote touch screen, and a buzzer. Always
check the surrounding area when using this system.

Types of sensors
1

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors
4

On/off
To turn the system on, press the switch.
The indicator light comes on and the
buzzer sounds to inform the driver that
the system is operational.
To turn the system off, press the switch
again.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Intuitive parking assist switch

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multi-information display and the remote touch screen depending on the position and distance
to the obstacle.


Multi-information display

Front corner sensor operation

Front center sensor operation

Rear corner sensor operation

Rear center sensor operation



Remote touch screen

Intuitive parking assist

Rear Cross
equipped)

Traffic

Alert

(if

A graphic is automatically displayed on
the side display when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so that
the graphic is not displayed.
: Select to mute the buzzer
sounds.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

289

Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
■ Distance display

Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.
Multi-information
display

(continuous)

Remote touch
screen

Approximate distance to obstacle
Corner sensor/
front center sensor

Rear center sensor

Front center
sensor:
3.3 ft. (100 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm)

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to
2.6 ft. (80 cm)

(continuous)
4

(continuous)

(blinking)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2.6 ft. (80 cm) to
2.1 ft. (65 cm)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)

2.1 ft. (65 cm) to
1.6 ft. (50 cm)

Less than
1.1 ft. (35 cm)

Less than
1.6 ft. (50 cm)

(continuous)

Driving

(continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
● The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the
buzzer sounds continuously.
• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
• Corner: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system
responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.
● You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (→P. 291)

Detection range of the sensors
1

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range
of the sensors. Note that the sensors
may not be able to detect obstacles that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object
etc.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

291

Setting up intuitive parking assist
You can change the buzzer sound volume and the screen operating conditions.
1

Press the “SETUP” button.

Select “Vehicle”, and then select “LEXUS Park Assist”/“LEXUS Park Assist
Settings” on the screen.

Select the desired item.
1

The buzzer sound volume can be
adjusted.

On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.

Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be
set.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
● Front corner sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
(At any speed when the shift lever is in R)
● Front center sensors:
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Rear corner and rear center sensors:
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.
■ Intuitive parking assist display
When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system, Lexus parking assist
monitor or Multi-terrain Monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the upper
corner of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s bumper.
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a
sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are
listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal
display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape,
signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

293

● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular atten-

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

tion to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
● The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance
may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow
speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s detection
areas before the display is shown and the buzzer sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached,
even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise
of the air conditioning system.
■ If “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-information display
A sensor may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the
sensor, the system should return to normal.
Also, due to the sensor being frozen at low temperatures, a malfunction display may
appear or an obstacle may not be detected. If the sensor thaws out, the system should
return to normal.
■ If “Parking Assist Malfunction” is displayed on the multi-information display
Depending on the malfunction of the sensor, the device may not be working normally.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Certification for the intuitive parking assist (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. buzzer sounds volume) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ When using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly
cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or
reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.
● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
NOTICE
■ When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
● A buzzer does not sound when you turn the intuitive parking assist on.
● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a buzzer sounds when no
obstacles are detected.
● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.
● If the bumper collides with something.
● If the display shows continuously without a buzzer.
● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the
sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

295

4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension)
The 4-Wheel AHC adjusts the vehicle height in accordance with driving conditions. There are 3 selectable modes, “HI” (high), “N” (normal), and “LO”
(low).
1

Easy access mode switch

Height control OFF switch

Height select switch

Driving

Selecting vehicle height
1

Higher

Lower

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Display
1

Current mode
The vehicle is in the N (normal) height
mode in the illustration.
and
show directions in which it is possible to
adjust the vehicle height.

Height up

Height down

Height control “OFF” indicator
When the height control “OFF” indicator is displayed, the vehicle height will not
change even if the height select switch is operated.

Vehicle height modes
Push the height select switch to “∧” to step up one height mode, and pull to “∨” to
step down one height mode. (Ex. When in the low height mode, push to “∧” once
to switch to the normal height mode, and twice to switch to the high height
mode.)
■ “HI” (high) height mode

Vehicle height is about 2.0 in. (50 mm) higher at the front, and about 2.4 in.
(60 mm) higher at the rear than the normal mode height.
This mode is suitable when driving on bumpy roads or through water.
High height mode is only available when the vehicle speed is under 18 mph
(30 km/h).
■ N (normal) height mode

The standard vehicle height. This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.
When driving at high speeds, the vehicle height is automatically lowered by
0.8 in. (20 mm) in the front and 0.6 in. (15 mm) in the rear, to ensure excellent
aerodynamic characteristics and stability.
If the vehicle speed drops, normal height mode is automatically resumed.
■ “LO” (low) height mode

Vehicle height is about 2.4 in. (60 mm) lower at the front, and about 1.6 in. (40
mm) lower at the rear than the normal mode height.
This mode allows easy access to the vehicle.
Low height mode is only available when the vehicle is travelling at 7 mph
(12 km/h) or less. When the vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (12 km/h), normal
height mode is automatically selected.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

297

Conditions for changing the vehicle height mode
Some modes may not be selectable depending on the vehicle speed when the
four-wheel drive control switch is in the H4 position. Refer to the following table.
Low mode

Normal mode

High mode

Under 7 mph (12 km/h)

Yes

7 mph (12 km/h) to
18 mph (30 km/h)

Yes

18 mph (30 km/h) or over

Yes

Easy access mode
You can select this mode for easy
access and easy loading of the vehicle.

Easy access mode is available if the following conditions have been met:
● The vehicle height mode is in normal mode.
● The vehicle is stopped on a flat surface.
● The shift lever is in P.
● The side doors and back door are not opened after the vehicle is stopped.
The following method will cancel the vehicle lowering operation and raise the
vehicle again:
● Press the height control OFF switch.
● Push the height select switch to “∧”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

If the engine switch is turned off within
approximately 30 seconds after the
vehicle is stopped while easy access
mode is on, the vehicle height is lowered
automatically.
When the vehicle begins to lower a
beep will sound twice, and while the
vehicle is lowering the indicator light will
flash to alert the driver and surrounding
people that the vehicle is lowering.
The indicator light stops blinking, and comes on continuously to indicate that the shift
is completed.

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Disabling the height control
When the height control OFF switch is
pressed with the vehicle stopped.
The height control “OFF” indicator will
appear on the multi-information display,
and the vehicle height will be fixed in the
current mode. Push the switch again to
turn the system back on.

■ Operating conditions
● The engine must be running.
● Vehicle height control must be turned off.
● All side doors and the back door must be closed.
■ Switching vehicle height mode while the engine is stopped
● If the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being lowered, lowering will continue.
● If any luggage is removed from the vehicle or if any occupants leave the vehicle within

approximately 30 seconds of the engine switch being turned off, the vehicle height may
be lowered by the auto leveling function.
● Operating the height select switch will have no effect while the engine is stopped.
■ Automatic change in vehicle height when the four-wheel drive control switch is in the
L4 position
If the vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h) while driving on an uneven road with the
four-wheel drive control switch in the “L4” position, high mode is automatically selected.
(On even roads, the height mode will not change.)
■ Automatic change in vehicle height when in the high mode
● If the vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h) with the four-wheel drive control switch
in the “H4” position, normal mode is automatically selected.
● If the vehicle speed exceeds 30 mph (50 km/h) with the four-wheel drive control
switch in the “L4” position, the vehicle height is lowered to 1.0 in. (25 mm) higher than
the normal mode height. If the vehicle speed drops to 13 mph (20 km/h) or less, high
mode is automatically resumed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

299

■ Extra high mode

● If the vehicle height cannot be raised when in the normal mode, and “LO” appears on

the display, the vehicle is loaded too heavily. Take extra care when driving in this condition.
If the vehicle height cannot be raised even after unloading the vehicle, pull the height
select switch to “∨” then push to “∧”. If the vehicle height still cannot be raised, turn the
ignition off then on again, then try once more.
■ When the vehicle is stopped during driving
The activation of the automatic leveling function may cause the vehicle height to change.
This is not a malfunction.
■ If the vehicle height does not change
If the vehicle is loaded too heavily, or the undercarriage has come into contact with the
road surface, the vehicle height cannot be raised/lowered.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

If the vehicle becomes stuck or the Crawl Control system requests the vehicle height be
raised, extra high mode may be automatically selected when the vehicle height is in high
mode with the four-wheel drive control switch in the L4 position.
The vehicle height is raised to 0.8 in. (20 mm) higher than the high mode height, or
slightly higher.
● Extra high mode will change back to high mode when:
• The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)
• The four-wheel drive control switch is shifted to H4.
● If you pull the height select switch to “∨” when in extra high mode, normal mode is
selected.
● Extra high mode cannot be manually selected.
■ Turning off the height control
● The system will remain off until the height control “OFF” switch is pushed again, even if
the engine switch is turned off.
● Even if the system is turned off, the system will intervene automatically if the vehicle
speed exceeds the following.
• 18 mph (30 km/h) with high or low mode
• 50 mph (80 km/h) with normal mode
■ Automatic leveling function
The vehicle is adjusted to a fixed height for each mode, regardless of the number of
occupants and the luggage load.
● However the vehicle cannot be raised if the vehicle load exceeds the following limits:
• Up to 4 occupants* plus approximately 661 lb. (300 kg) in the normal mode
• Up to 4 occupants* plus approximately 441 lb. (200 kg) in the high mode
*: average weight 150 lb. (68 kg) per person

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ In the following cases the 4-Wheel AHC will not operate
● The brake pedal has been depressed for a few seconds or longer while the vehicle is

stopped.

● Vehicle height control has not been frequently used.
● The suspension fluid temperature is lower than -22°F (-30°C).
● There is ice on the suspension.
● Driving on bumpy roads which may cause the suspension to fully elongate.
● If the steering wheel is abruptly turned more than 3/4 of a revolution with the center dif-

ferential lock system activated.

■ Cold weather operation

It may take longer for the vehicle height to change if the suspension fluid temperature
drops below 5°F (-15°C).
The 4-Wheel AHC does not operate when the suspension fluid temperature drops
below -22°F (-30°C).
● In this case, even if the height select switch is pressed, the vehicle height will not change.
Once the vehicle has been driven for a short time and the suspension fluid has been
warmed to within normal operating limits, the 4-Wheel AHC will begin operating and
the vehicle height will automatically change to the selected mode.
● When the suspension fluid is around -22°F (-30°C), the vehicle height may not be able
to be raised, even if the 4-Wheel AHC is operating. In this case, pull the height select
switch to “∨” then push to “∧” after driving for a short time longer to select the desired
vehicle height.
■ Parking and stopping tips
● If you immediately stop the engine after off-road driving, the vehicle height may gradually lower. When parking, make sure there is nothing under the vehicle that may come
in contact with the underbody. The vehicle will return to the set height when the engine
is started.
● The vehicle height may change as the temperature changes when the engine is
stopped. The vehicle will return to the set height when the engine is started.
■ Propeller shaft noise
If the vehicle height is adjusted on a slope, or with the shift lever in a position other than P
or N while the vehicle is stopped, you may hear a sound caused by the expansion and
contraction of the propeller shaft. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ 4-Wheel AHC failure warning
If a malfunction occurs in the 4-Wheel AHC, normal mode is automatically selected.
However, the system may not switch to normal mode depending on the location of the
malfunction.
The warning message is displayed on the multi-information display, and the 4-Wheel
AHC cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected.
Stop the engine and start it again. If the warning message turns off, the system is operating correctly. If the warning message continues to be displayed, have the vehicle checked
at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

301

WARNING
■ When switching the vehicle height mode

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Before lowering the vehicle height, check that there are no people under or around the
vehicle, and check for obstacles.
If you do not do this, body parts may be caught in the vehicle, possibly leading to an
accident.
■ Using the high mode
The high mode should only be used when driving on rough roads, for example when
driving off-road. Because the vehicle’s center of gravity will become higher when in the
mode, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly, resulting in an accident.
■ When jacking up the vehicle or installing tire chains
Turn off the height control and stop the engine, otherwise the vehicle height may
change due to the automatic leveling function and you may catch part of your body in
the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
■ When crossing rivers
Select the high mode and turn off the height control. Drive at 18 mph (30 km/h) or
lower. Otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function,
resulting in an accident.
■ If your vehicle must be towed
Put the vehicle height in the normal mode and turn off the height control, otherwise the
vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function and you may catch
part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
■ If your vehicle becomes stuck in a ditch
Turn off the height control, otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.
■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier
Do not switch to high mode. Sudden steering could cause the vehicle to lose stability
due to the vehicle’s higher center of gravity, possibly leading to an accident.

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE

■ When parking in areas with limited overhead height

After leaving the vehicle or unloading the luggage, the vehicle height may be slightly
higher than normal. Take care when overhead height is limited.
■ To avoid damage to the vehicle
● Normal mode will be switched to automatically even if the vehicle is started off in low
mode. Take care when overhead height is limited.
● Do not select the low mode when driving on bumpy roads, as the underbody of the
vehicle may contact the road surface.
● When traveling on bumpy roads or through water, or when towing, turn off easy
access mode.
■ Avoid rapid changes to the vehicle height
As the pump may overheat. Leave at a few seconds between selections when changing
the vehicle height mode.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

303

Four-wheel drive system
Use the four-wheel drive control switch and center differential lock/unlock
switch to select the following transfer and center differential modes.

Four-wheel drive control switch
1

H4 (high speed position)
Normal driving on all types of roads.

L4 (low speed position)
Driving requiring maximum power and
traction such as climbing or descending
steep hills, off-road driving, and hard
pulling in sand or mud, etc.
The low speed four-wheel drive indicator will come on.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Center differential lock/unlock switch
Lock the center differential when your
vehicle’s wheels get stuck in a ditch or
when driving on a slippery or bumpy
surface.
The center differential lock indicator will
come on.
Unlock the center differential after the
wheels have been freed, or after moving
to a flat, non-slippery surface.
To unlock the center differential, push the switch again.

Shifting between H4 and L4
■ Shifting from H4 to L4
1

Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal held down.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Push and shift the four-wheel drive control switch to L4.
Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on.

■ Shifting from L4 to H4
1

Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal held down.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Push and shift the four-wheel drive control switch to H4.
Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns off.

■ The four-wheel drive control switch can be operated when
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The shift lever is in the N position.
● The vehicle is stopped completely.
■ The low speed four-wheel drive indicator light

The indicator light blinks while shifting between H4 and L4.
■ Advice for driving on slippery roads
● If you shift the four-wheel drive control switch to L4 and the shift lever to the 2 range of

S or D (vehicles with paddle shift switches) while driving in steep off-road areas, the
output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the Active TRAC, which assists the
driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.
● Use the 1 range of S or D (vehicles with paddle shift switches) for maximum power and
traction when your wheels get stuck or when driving down a steep incline.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

305

■ The center differential lock indicator light

The indicator light blinks while locking/unlocking the center differential.
■ The center differential lock/unlock switch can be operated when
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The vehicle speed is less than 62 mph (100 km/h).
■ Locking/unlocking the center differential
● When the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4 with the center differential locked,

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

VSC is automatically turned off. (The center differential lock and VSC OFF indicator
lights come on.)
● If the operation is not completed, the center differential lock indicator blinks. If the indicator light does not turn off when unlocking the center differential, drive straight ahead
while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
● If the center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds while the cruise
control system is on, cancel the cruise control system.
■ If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator
light blinks
● If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when using the fourwheel drive control switch, stop the vehicle completely, move the shift lever to N and
operate the switch again.
● If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on/off,
the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move
regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or
someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer
mode.
To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever to N, and
confirm that the shift was completed (the indicator turns on/off).
● If the engine coolant temperature is too low, the four-wheel drive control system may
not be able to shift. When the engine is warmer operate the switch again.
If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator
light continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may be a malfunction in
the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be
able to shift between H4 and L4, and the center differential lock may not be operable.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ While driving

Never move the four-wheel drive control switch if the wheels have lost traction. Doing
so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is parked
If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on/off,
the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move
regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer
sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or
someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer
mode.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the center differential
● For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential.
● Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery

or bumpy surface.

● Do not push the center differential lock/unlock switch when the vehicle is turning or

when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

307

Crawl Control (with Turn Assist function)
Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low speed without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Minimizes loss of traction or
vehicle slip when driving on slippery road surfaces, allowing for stable driving.

Crawl Control switches
1

ON/OFF switch

Speed selection switch

Indicators
The Crawl Control indicator is lit and
the slip indicator flashes when operating.

Multi-information display

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

The operating status and speed select
status of the Crawl Control are shown
on the multi-information display.

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Speed modes
The following table shows some typical
terrains and the recommended speed
modes.

Mode
1

Lo-Med

Med

Med-Hi

Road condition
Rock, mogul (downhill) and gravel (downhill)
Mogul (uphill)
Snow, mud, gravel (uphill), sand, dirt,
mogul (uphill) and grass

Turn Assist function
This function assists cornering performance in accordance with steering operation when driving through a tight corner. It maintains vehicle speed while driving
and reduces the number of turns needed to navigate a corner that requires turning the wheel in the opposite direction.
Press the Turn Assist switch while
Crawl Control is operating.
Turn Assist indicator will come on.
To turn the system off, press the switch
again.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

309

When the system is turned off


Crawl Control

Press the ON/OFF switch while Crawl Control is operating. If the switch is
turned off, the slip indicator and the Turn Assist indicator will go off (if the Turn
Assist function is in use), the Crawl Control indicator will flash until the system
has turned off completely, and a message stating that Crawl Control has been
turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several seconds.
When turning off Crawl Control while driving, stop the vehicle before the Crawl
Control indicator turns off, or drive extremely carefully.


Turn Assist function

Press the Turn Assist switch while the Turn Assist function is operating. When the
switch is pressed, the Turn Assist indicator will go off, and a message stating that
the Turn Assist function has been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several seconds.

Crawl Control
● The engine is running.
● The shift lever is in any gear other than P or N.
● The four-wheel drive control switch is in L4.
● The driver’s door is closed.
 Turn Assist function
● Crawl Control is operating.
● The center differential is not locked.
● The accelerator and brake are not being operated.
● The shift lever is in any gear other than P, R or N.
● The steering wheel is turned very far.


LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

■ The Crawl Control and Turn Assist function can be operated when

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Automatic system cancelation

Crawl Control
In the following situations, the buzzer will sound intermittently and Crawl Control will be
canceled automatically. In this event, the Crawl Control indicator will flash and then go
off, the Turn Assist indicator will go off (if the Turn Assist function is in use), and a message
stating that Crawl Control has been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information
display for several seconds.
● When the shift lever is moved to P or N.
● When the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4.
● When the driver’s door is opened.
 Turn Assist function
When the center differential is locked, the buzzer will sound intermittently and the Turn
Assist function will be canceled automatically. In this event, the Turn Assist indicator will
go off, and a message stating that the Turn Assist function has been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several seconds.
■ Function limitations
 Crawl Control
● In the following situations, brake control can be used to drive downhill at a constant
speed. However, engine control is not available when driving uphill at a constant speed.
• When switched to second start mode.
● In the following situation, engine control and brake control will stop temporarily. In this
event, the Crawl Control indicator will flash.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).
 Turn Assist function
In the following situations, the Turn Assist function will stop temporarily. In this event, the
Turn Assist indicator will flash.
● When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
● When the shift lever is moved to R.
■ When the Crawl Control system is operated continuously
● If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound, a malfunction notification will be displayed on the multi-information display, the Crawl Control
indicator will go off, and Crawl Control will be temporarily inoperable as a result of the
brake system overheating. In this event, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe place,
and allow the brake system to cool down sufficiently until the TRAC OFF indicator
goes off. (In the meantime, normal driving is possible.)
● If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound, the system
will be temporarily canceled, and a malfunction notification will be displayed on the
multi-information display as a result of the automatic transmission system overheating.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place until the display goes off.
■ When depressing the accelerator pedal while the Crawl Control is operating
Multi-terrain Select operates in AUTO mode. (→P. 313)


LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

311

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the Crawl Control system
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just

after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in Crawl Control system.
● Either of the following conditions may occur when the Crawl Control system is operating. None of these are indicators that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on. (→P. 520, 528)
WARNING
■ When using Crawl Control and Turn Assist function

NOTICE
■ When using Turn Assist function

The Turn Assist function is a function to assist turning performance when driving off
road. The function may be less effective on paved road surfaces.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Do not rely solely on the Crawl Control and Turn Assist function. This function does not
extend the vehicle’s performance limitations. Always thoroughly check the road conditions, and drive safely.
■ These conditions may cause the system not to operate properly
When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able to maintain a fixed
low speed, which may result in an accident:
● Extremely steep inclines.
● Extremely uneven surfaces.
● Snow-covered roads, or other slippery surfaces.

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-terrain Select
Multi-terrain Select is a system that helps drivability in off-road situations.


When the Crawl Control is turned off

Select a mode that most closely matches the type of terrain on which you are
driving from among 5 modes.
Brake control can be optimized in accordance with the selected mode.


When the Crawl Control is turned on

A mode which matches the road conditions is automatically selected by
depressing the accelerator pedal (AUTO mode).

Multi-terrain Select switch/indicators
1

Multi-terrain Select mode selector
switch

Multi-terrain Select indicator

Multi-information display
Displays status information including
operating status and road type
selection.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

313

Selectable modes
When the Crawl Control is turned off, a
mode which matches the road conditions can be selected from among the
following 5 modes.
1

MUD & SAND

LOOSE ROCK

MOGUL

ROCK & DIRT

ROCK
Road Conditions

MUD & SAND

Suitable for muddy roads, sandy roads, snow-covered roads, dirt
trails and other slippery or dirty conditions

LOOSE ROCK

Suitable for slippery conditions consisting of mixtures of earth
and loose rock

MOGUL

Suitable for a wide range of off-road conditions, particularly very
bumpy conditions

ROCK & DIRT

Suitable for very bumpy road conditions, such as mogul or rocky
roads.

ROCK

Suitable for rocky terrain

When the Crawl Control is turned on, the most suitable mode is automatically
selected according to the Crawl Control mode selected.

Multi-terrain Select control starting conditions
When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the Multi-terrain Select indicator will come on, the mode select screen will be displayed on the multi-information display, and Multi-terrain Select control will begin.
● The four-wheel drive control switch is in “L4”.
● Both Active TRAC and VSC are not off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Mode

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Switching modes
Operate the Multi-terrain Select mode
selector switch during Multi-terrain
Select control to select a mode.
Once the mode is confirmed, the mode
name will be displayed and the control
will switch.

■ Automatic system cancelation

In the following situations, the Multi-terrain Select indicator will go off, and Multi-terrain
Select will be canceled automatically.
● When the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4.
● When Active TRAC and VSC are off.
■ When it is difficult to generate traction
MUD & SAND mode provides the largest amount of tire slippage, followed by LOOSE
ROCK, MOGUL, ROCK & DIRT and ROCK mode.
Drivability can be improved by selecting a mode which provides a smaller amount of tire
slippage than the current mode when the amount of tire slippage is large, or conversely
selecting a mode which provides a larger amount of tire slippage than the current mode
when the amount of tire slippage is small.
■ When the vehicle is stuck
Switching the transfer and differential
For the operation of the following functions, refer to the following pages.
● Four-wheel drive system (→P. 303)
● Center differential lock (→P. 304)
■ When the brake system operates continuously
The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, the TRAC OFF indicator will flash, and Multi-terrain Select will be temporarily inoperable. In this event, stop
the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake system to cool down sufficiently. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)
After a short time, the TRAC OFF indicator will go off, and you will be able to use Multiterrain Select.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
The slip indicator light will come on. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

315

WARNING
■ When using the Multi-terrain Select

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or
serious injuries:
● There is a chance that the selected mode may not be the most appropriate in terms of
road conditions such as pitch, slipperiness, undulation, etc. (→P. 313)
● Multi-terrain Select is not intended to expand the limits of the vehicle. Check the road
conditions thoroughly beforehand, and drive safely and carefully.
NOTICE
■ Precaution for use

The Multi-terrain Select is intended for use during off-road driving. Do not use the system at any other time.
4

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

316

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-terrain Monitor
The Multi-terrain Monitor helps the driver to check the vehicle surroundings.
It assists in determining the conditions around the driver in a variety of situations, such as when judging conditions during off-road driving or checking for
obstacles when parking.
WARNING
■ When using the Multi-terrain Monitor system

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or
serious injuries.
● Never rely solely on the Multi-terrain Monitor. As with unequipped vehicles, drive
carefully while directly confirming the safety of your surroundings and the area to the
rear of the vehicle. Take particular care to avoid parked cars and other obstacles.
● Due to the characteristics of the camera lens, the actual position and distance of people and other obstacles will differ from those shown on the Multi-terrain Monitor
screen. Directly confirm the safety of your surroundings before driving.
● Do not drive while only looking at the screen. When driving, make sure to directly
confirm the safety of your surroundings, such as by visually checking the area and
using the vehicle’s mirrors.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the images may become faint.
Images of moving objects in particular may distort or disappear from the screen.
Therefore, make sure to drive carefully while directly visually confirming the safety of
your surroundings.

Multi-terrain Monitor screens
The following screens can be selected according to driving conditions.
• Screens that can be selected vary depending on conditions such as shift position and vehicle speed. (→P. 322)
• Depending on the displayed screen, the display can be switched from normal
to wide view display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

317

■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4
● When checking the area to the front and sides of the vehicle


Front view & dual side view

→P. 325



Front view & dual side view (front
magnified)

→P. 325

● When checking the condition of the road surface under the vehicle


→P. 329

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)



Under vehicle terrain view & dual
side view (front magnified)

→P. 329

Driving

Under vehicle terrain view & dual
side view

318

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When checking the area to the rear of the vehicle



Rear view & dual side view

→P. 331



Wide rear view

→P. 331

■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4
● When checking the area to the front of the vehicle (panoramic view & wide

front view)
→P. 333

● When checking the area to the sides of the vehicle (side views)

→P. 335

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

319

● When checking the area to the rear of the vehicle


Panoramic view & rear view

→P. 338



Wide rear view

→P. 338

● When checking the area to the sides, front and rear of the vehicle (with out-

side rear view mirrors retracted)



Wide front view & side view



Rear view & side view

Driving

→P. 344


Side views

→P. 344

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

→P. 344

320

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Using the Multi-terrain Monitor screen
■ Displaying the Multi-terrain Monitor screen

The Multi-terrain Monitor screen will be displayed when the VIEW switch is
pressed while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain value for a specific amount of time, the
display returns to the navigation or information display screen.
The amount of time that the Multi-terrain Monitor is displayed differs depending
on conditions such as the vehicle speed. (→P. 325)
1

VIEW switch

Display

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

321

■ Switch operations

On some screens, the display mode or display settings can be changed using
the switches.
● Automatic display mode switch
When automatic display mode is turned on, the Multi-terrain Monitor
screen is displayed in the following conditions, even if the VIEW switch has
not been operated.
• The shift lever is shifted to D or N
• While driving, the vehicle speed drops to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or less (except when the shift lever is in R)
The automatic display mode
switches between on and off each
time

is selected.

When automatic display mode is
on, an indicator illuminates on the
icon.

Driving

Even when automatic display
mode is on, the display can still be
switched by pressing the VIEW
switch.

Indicator

● Display selection switches

The following switches can be pressed or selected to switch the Multi-terrain Monitor display screen and to switch from normal to wide view display.
Switch

Switch Function

VIEW switch

Changing a display (→P. 322)

Angle
mode
selection switch

Switches between the wide rear view and
wide view display (→P. 331, 338)

Under vehicle terrain view selection
switch

Switches between the front view and under
vehicle terrain view (→P. 325, 329)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

322

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing the Multi-terrain Monitor screen
The screen display can be switched by operating the switches as follows while
the Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed. (Screens that can be displayed will
vary depending on the positions of the shift lever and four-wheel drive control
switch)
■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4

: Press
: Select
: Select
: Operate the shift lever

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

323

Driving

Front view & dual side view:
→P. 325

Under vehicle terrain view & dual
side view (front magnified):
→P. 329

Under vehicle terrain view & dual
5 Rear view & dual side view:
side view: →P. 329
→P. 331
3 Front view & dual side view (front
6 Wide rear view: →P. 331
magnified): →P. 325
2

*: The screen display can be switched by touching the image from the camera on the
screen.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

324

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4

: Press
: Select
: Operate the shift lever

Navigation screen, information set- 4 Panoramic view & rear view:
tings screen, etc.
→P. 338

Side views: →P. 335

Panoramic view & wide front view:
→P. 333

Wide rear view: →P. 338

*1: The displayed screen differs when the outside rear view mirrors are retracted.
*2: The screen display can be switched by touching the image from the camera on the
screen.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

325

■ Multi-terrain Monitor screen display

The amount of time that the Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed changes as follows
according to the vehicle speed at the time the VIEW switch was pressed.
The Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed if the vehicle speed is approximately 7 mph
(12 km/h) or less when the camera switch is pressed.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 7 mph (12 km/h), the Multi-terrain Monitor
display is canceled.

Screen display and functions
The various screens of the Multi-terrain Monitor display information to support
several different driving situations, such as when checking for obstacles when
moving forward or in reverse, or when judging road surface conditions during
off-road driving.
■ Front view & dual side view

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Front view & dual side view can be used to check the area around the front of
the vehicle.
• In addition to an image of the front of the vehicle, guide lines are displayed
in a composite view to provide reference for when deciding a direction to
move forward in.
• If the VIEW switch is pressed while the screen is displayed, the screen
switches from normal to magnified display. (Pressing the switch again
returns the screen to the normal display)
• If the steering wheel is turned 270° or more, guide lines and other features
to support turning are automatically displayed.

326

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Screen description

Under vehicle terrain view selection 7 6 ft. (2 m) distance guide line
(blue)
switch
Switches between front view and under
vehicle terrain view display each time
the switch is selected.

Items 5 to 7 indicate the estimated
distance from the front end of the vehicle.

Automatic display mode selection 8 Front tire course line (yellow)
switch
Indicates the estimated course of the
front tires according to steering wheel
position.

→P. 321
3

Tilt meter/slip display
Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree
of incline or indicates a tire slippage.
(→P. 327)

Vehicle width lines (blue)

Forward movement guide line
(blue)
Indicates the estimated tire course of
the tightest possible turn.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Indicate the width of the vehicle including the outside rear view mirror.
11 Rear tire contact line (blue)
5

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line
(red)

3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line (blue)

Items 10 and 11 indicate estimated tire
positions on the image.
12

Rear tire course line (yellow)
Indicates the estimated course of the
rear tires.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

327

● Front view rotating display function

This function operates when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4.
The front view image is automatically adjusted to be parallel and assist the
driver to check road surface conditions regardless of the vehicle inclination.

● Tilt meter

Degree markers of incline to
the front and rear
Indicates the vehicle inclination in
degrees in the front and rear
directions.

Degree markers of incline to the left and right
Indicates the vehicle inclination in degrees in the left and right directions.

Pointer
Indicates the degree of the vehicle inclination in comparison to a parallel line.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Tilt meter displays the vehicle
inclination to the front, rear, left
and right within a range of 0° to
approximately 30°.

328

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Slip display

When tire slippage is detected,
the tilt meter display area is automatically switched to the slip display.
1

Tire display
Indicates the position of freely
spinning tires in yellow if the tire
spins. (During Crawl Control is
operating, all of the tires are indicated in yellow.)

Pop-up display of the intuitive parking assist
Displayed if an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is turned
on.

Pop-up display of the RCTA (if equipped)
Displayed if a vehicle approaching from right or left rear of the vehicle is
detected while the RCTA is turned on.

■ Front view & dual side view display

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.
■ Front view rotating display function
● The vehicle inclination displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state.
● When the rotated screen is displayed, the corners of the front bumper may not be seen

on the screen.
■ Tilt meter display
● The display indicates the incline of the vehicle in degrees shown by the movement of
the pointer and the rotation of the vehicle image.
● The color of the degree markers of incline to the front, rear, left and right changes
according to the current incline of the vehicle.
● After the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the degree of incline is not
displayed until such information is determined.
● The degree of incline showed on the tilt meter is only an approximate indication, and
may differ from the degree of incline measured using other equipment.
■ Tilt meter/slip display
When the intuitive parking assist or RCTA (if equipped) detects an obstacle or another
vehicle, a warning message pops up in the tilt meter/slip display area.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

329

■ Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view

Lines indicating current vehicle and tire position are displayed in a composite
view on an image taken approximately 10 ft. (3 m) behind the current vehicle
position and assists the driver to check conditions underneath the vehicle or
determine the position of the front tires.

Current vehicle position

Image displayed in the under vehicle terrain view (image taken approximately
10 ft. (3 m) behind the current vehicle position)

Vehicle position at the time the image was taken (approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
behind the current vehicle position)
● Displaying the under vehicle terrain view
While the front view is displayed, stop the vehicle completely, and then
press
Pressing

.
again returns the screen to the front view display.

● Screen description
1

Tire position indicator lines
(black)
Indicates the estimated position of
the front tires.

Vehicle position indicator lines
(blue)
Indicates the estimated position of
the vehicle.

Icon (flashing)
Indicates that the under vehicle terrain view display is of an image taken in the
past.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

330

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view
● The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in D or N.
● While the under vehicle terrain view is displayed, if the vehicle speed reaches or

exceeds approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the screen automatically returns to the front
view display.
● In the following situations, the under vehicle terrain view selection switch cannot be
operated.
• The vehicle is not completely stopped
• After the engine starts, a fixed distance or more has not been driven
• After the four-wheel drive control switch is shifted to L4, a fixed distance or more
has not been driven
● In the following situations, the system may not operate normally, or it may not be possible to switch to the under vehicle terrain view.
• The road is covered with snow
• It is nighttime and the road has no illumination
• Dirt or foreign matter is adhering to the camera lens
• There is water in front of the vehicle (a river, puddle, sea water, etc.)
WARNING
■ Guide lines

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

331

■ Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view

Guide lines are displayed in a composite view on an image of the area to the
rear of the vehicle to use as a reference when deciding a course of movement
and assist the driver to check the safety of the area to the rear of the vehicle or
to park the vehicle.
● Screen description
The following 2 types of display mode can be selected according to conditions.


Rear view & dual side view display



Wide rear view display

Angle selection switch
Switches between rear view & dual side view display and wide rear view display each
time the switch is selected.

Tilt meter/slip display
→P. 327

Projected course lines (yellow)
Indicate the estimated course of the vehicle according to steering operations.

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red)

3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line (yellow)

8 ft. (2.5 m) distance guide line (yellow)
4

and

indicate the estimated distance from the rear end of the vehicle.

Vehicle width extension guide line (blue)
Indicates the estimated vehicle width including the outside rear view mirrors.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Rear tire contact line (blue)
Items

and

indicate estimated tire positions on the image.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

332

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in R.
■ Guide lines

If the back door is not closed, guide lines will not be displayed. If the guide lines do not
display even when the back door is closed, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer.
WARNING
■ Guide lines

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

333

■ Panoramic view & wide front view

The image looking down at the vehicle from above and the image from the
front camera are displayed simultaneously and assist the driver to check conditions in front, and to the right and left, of the vehicle at intersections or Tjunctions with poor visibility.
● Screen description
The following 2 types of display mode can be selected according to conditions.


Distance guide line display mode



Projected course line display mode

Panoramic view
Displays an image looking down at the vehicle from above.

Wide front view
Displays an image of the area to the front of the vehicle.

Display area

Guide line display selection switch
→P. 334

Automatic display mode selection switch
→P. 321

Front distance guide line (blue)
Indicates a distance approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the front end of the vehicle.

Forward projected course lines
Automatically displayed when the steering wheel is turned 90° or more from the center position.
Indicates the estimated course of the vehicle according to steering wheel operations.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

334

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Switching to automatic display mode

→P. 321
● Switching guide line display modes

The mode switches and the switch display changes each time the guide line
display selection switch is selected.
Selected mode

Distance guide line display
mode

Projected course line display
mode

Switch display

■ Panoramic view & wide front view

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.
WARNING
■ Guide lines

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

335

■ Side views

The image from the both side cameras is displayed and assists the driver to
check conditions on the sides of the vehicle or to confirm the safety of narrow
roads.
● Screen description
1

Side view (left front side)

Side view (right front side)

Display area

Vehicle width lines (blue)
Indicate the estimated vehicle
width including the outside rear
view mirrors.

Front distance guide line (red)
Indicates a distance approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the front end of the vehicle.

Automatic display mode selection switch
→P. 321

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Indicates the estimated front tire position on the image.
7

Front tire contact line (blue)

336

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Using the vehicle width lines

The relative distance of obstacles from the vehicle width lines can be confirmed.
Example 1:

When there is an obstacle in front of the vehicle
Operate the steering wheel so that the vehicle width line and
the obstacle do not overlap.

Example 2:

When parking on the shoulder
Approach the shoulder, but do not allow the vehicle width
line to overlap the curb or other obstacles.
After confirming the distance to the shoulder of the road,
maneuvering the vehicle so that the vehicle width line and
the curb or other obstacle are parallel allows the vehicle to
be parked evenly.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

337

■ Side views
● The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.
● When the outside rear view mirrors are retracted, the displayed area changes (the area

on the screen that is not masked in black). (→P. 344)
WARNING

■ Guide lines

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

338

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view

• Panoramic view & rear view:

The image looking down at the vehicle from above and the image from the
rear camera are displayed simultaneously and assist the driver to check the
safety of the area when parking.
• Wide rear view:
The image from the rear camera is displayed in a range of approximately
180° and assists the driver to check the safety of the area when backing up.
● Screen description


Panoramic view & rear view

Guide line selection switch



Wide rear view

→P. 334
2

Angle mode selection switch
Switches between the panoramic view & rear view and wide rear view display each
time the switch is selected.

Panoramic view & rear view

Rear view
Switches the screen to wide rear view display when you touch the display.

Wide rear view
Switches the screen to the panoramic & rear view display when the display is touched.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

339

● Switching modes

The display mode switches and the icon display changes each time the
guide line display selection switch is selected.
Selected mode

Projected course
line display mode

Parking assist guide
line display mode

Distance guide line
display mode

Icon display

The panoramic view & rear view screen is explained here as an example.


Projected course line display mode

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)



Parking assist guide line display
mode

Driving

• Projected course line display mode:
Projected course lines that change according to steering wheel operations are displayed.
• Parking assist guide line display mode:
Inverted steering wheel operations (parking assist guide line) are displayed. Use this mode if you are used to how the vehicle handles (if you
can park without needing the course line display).
• Distance guide line display mode:
Only distance guide lines are displayed.
● Guide lines

340

4-5. Using the driving support systems



Distance guide line display mode

Front distance guide line (blue)
Indicates a distance approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the front end of the vehicle.

Rear vehicle width extension guide lines
Indicate the estimated course of the vehicle when backing up straight.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
• In projected course line display mode, this item overlaps the projected course lines
when going straight.

Side projected course line (yellow)
Indicates the projected reverse course calculated by the angle of the steering wheel.
The projected reverse course line on the outside of the turn is displayed according to
the direction of the steering wheel.

Rear distance guide line
Indicates the estimated distance from the end of the rear bumper (at the center). (Red
line: approximately 1.5 ft. [0.5 m] away. Yellow line: approximately 3 ft. [1 m] away.)
In projected course line display mode, the rear distance guide line changes according
to steering wheel operations.

Projected reverse course (yellow)
Changes according to steering wheel operations and indicates the estimated course
of the vehicle.

Rear distance guide line (blue)
Indicates a distance approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the end of the rear bumper (at
the center).

Parking assist guide line (blue)
Indicates the estimated tire course of the tightest possible turn in reverse.

Intuitive parking assist
When the intuitive parking assist is on, an icon will be displayed when an obstacle is
detected. (Refer to P. 287 for information about the intuitive parking assist.)

Vehicle center line (blue)
Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

341

● Parking operation (using the estimated curse line)

When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space
described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1

Shift the shift lever to the R position.

Turn the steering wheel so that
the estimated course lines are
within the parking space, and
back up slowly.
1

Parking space

Estimated course lines

Driving

When the rear position of the
vehicle has entered the parking
space, turn the steering wheel so
that the vehicle width extension
guide lines are within the left and
right dividing lines of the parking
space.
3

Vehicle width extension guide
line

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

342

4-5. Using the driving support systems
4

Once the vehicle width extension guide lines and the parking space lines
are parallel, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.

Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
● Parking operation (using the parking assist guide line)
5

When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space
described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1

Shift the shift lever to the R position.

Back up until the parking assist
guide line meets the edge of the
left-hand dividing line of the parking space.
1

Parking assist guide line

Parking space dividing line

Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and back up slowly.

Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the
parking space.

Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

343

■ Panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in R.
■ Guide lines

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from
actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road
grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always
drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.
■ When using panoramic view & rear view or wide rear view
● If the vehicle width extension guide lines and projected course lines are not aligned
with the steering wheel in the center position, drive straight on a road without as little
traffic and as few bends or curves as possible for approximately 5 minutes or more. If
the symptom is not resolved, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Rear vehicle width extension guide lines are displayed wider than the actual vehicle
width. When backing up, always confirm the safety of your surroundings and the area
to the rear of the vehicle.

344

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Display when the outside rear view mirrors are retracted (side view and

side views)

When the outside rear view mirrors are retracted, one of the following
screens is displayed and assists the driver to confirm the safety of the area
around the vehicle, or park alongside and close to another object.
● Screen description




When the wide front view is displayed



When the rear view is displayed

When the side views is displayed

For information about other than the side view and side views display area, refer
to the page for the respective screen.
1

Front distance guide line (red)
Indicates a distance approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the front end of the vehicle.

Front tire contact line (blue)
Indicates the estimated front tire position on the image.

Vehicle width lines (blue)
Indicate the estimated vehicle width including the outside rear view mirrors.

Rear tire contact line (blue)
Indicates the estimated rear tire position on the image.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

345

● Using the vehicle width lines

The relative distance of obstacles from the vehicle width lines can be confirmed.
• Approach the shoulder, but do not allow the vehicle width line to overlap
the curb or other obstacles.
• After confirming the distance to the shoulder, maneuvering the vehicle
so that the vehicle width line and the curb or other obstacle are parallel
allows the vehicle to be parked evenly.

■ Guide lines

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

WARNING

346

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Intuitive parking assist and RCTA cooperative display

When either the intuitive parking
assist (→P. 287) or Blind Spot Monitor (→P. 363) is turned on, an icon
warns the driver when an obstacle is
detected.

■ Intuitive parking assist cooperative display

While the intuitive parking assist is in use, an icon is displayed when an obstacle is
detected (→P. 287).
However, this function only informs the driver that an obstacle is close to the vehicle and
the detected obstacle is not displayed on the screen. Be sure to visually confirm the
safety of your surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

347

When using the Multi-terrain Monitor
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in an unexpected
accident. Also, when driving, make sure to directly confirm the safety of your surroundings and the area to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
■ Conditions under which the Multi-terrain Monitor should not be used

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Do not use the Multi-terrain Monitor in the following situations. The system may not
operate properly, resulting in an unexpected accident.
● When driving on an icy, snow-covered or otherwise slippery road surface
● When using tire chains or a spare tire
● When either front door or the back door is not completely closed
● When driving on an uneven road, such as a hill
● When tires or suspension parts other than those specified are equipped
When the tires are replaced, the position indicated by the guide lines displayed on the
screen may differ.
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from
actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road
grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always
drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

348

4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE

■ Panoramic view
● In the panoramic view, the system combines images taken from the front, back, left

and right side cameras into a single image. There are limits to the range and content
that can be displayed. Understand the characteristics of this system before using.
● Image clarity may decline at the four corners of the panoramic view. However, this is
not a malfunction, as these are the regions along the border of each camera image
where the images are combined.
● Depending on lighting conditions near each of the cameras, bright and dark patches
may appear on the panoramic view.
● The panoramic view display does not extend higher than the installation position and
image capture range of each camera.
● There are blind spots around the vehicle and there are regions that are not displayed
in the panoramic view.
● Three-dimensional objects displayed in wide front view or rear view may not be displayed in the panoramic view.
● People and other three-dimensional obstacles may appear differently when displayed in the panoramic view. (These differences include, among others, cases in
which displayed objects appear to have fallen over, disappear near image processing
areas, appear from image processing areas, or when the actual distance to an object
differs from the displayed position.)
● The panoramic view will not be properly displayed when either front door or the back
door is open.
● The vehicle icon displayed in the panoramic view is a computer generated image, and
properties such as the color, shape and size will differ from the actual vehicle. Therefore, nearby three-dimensional objects may appear to be touching the vehicle, and
actual distances to three-dimensional objects may differ from those displayed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

349

■ Display range
● Panoramic view

Not displayed.

Not displayed. (Displayed in black around the vehicle icon.)
● Wide front view

Driving

Masking

Parts of the vehicle (such as the bumper or grille) are displayed on the screen.

Camera visibility range

Object detectable by camera

Object not detectable by camera

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

350

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Side views

The side of the vehicle is displayed on the screen.

Camera visibility range

Object detectable by camera
● Side view

The side of the vehicle is displayed on the screen.

Camera visibility range

Object detectable by camera

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

351

● Rear view

The corners of the bumper are not seen on the screen.
● Wide rear view

Driving

The corners of the bumper are not seen on the screen.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

352

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Panoramic view display range
● In the panoramic view, the system processes and displays images acquired form the 4

cameras under the assumption that the vehicle is on a flat road surface. Therefore, the
display may appear as follows.
• Three-dimensional objects may appear to have fallen over, and be long and thin or
bigger than they actually are
• Three-dimensional objects at a point higher than the surface of the road may appear
further away than they actually are, or may not appear
• Tall objects may appear to emerge from the image processing seams
● Inconsistencies in the brightness of images from each camera may occur depending on
lighting conditions.
● The displayed image may not be aligned when the tilt or height of the vehicle changed
due to the number of passengers, cargo weight or remaining quantity of gasoline.
● The displayed image may not be aligned when the vehicle is in other than “N” (normal)
height mode. (→P. 295)
● Images and guide lines may not be properly displayed when the doors are not completely closed.
● The relative distances between the vehicle icon and road surface or an obstacle displayed in the panoramic view may differ from the actual state.
● If an illuminated license plate is used, it may appear on the screen.
● The black area around the vehicle icon is an area that is not appear in the camera.
Check these areas directly.
● The circled areas shown in the illustration may
be difficult to see, as these are points where
images are combined.

■ Wide front view display range
● Certain areas at the front of the vehicle have a different sense of distance, and are

masked in black so that they do not appear on the screen.

● There are limits to the range displayed on the screen. Objects at either corner of the

bumper or directly below the bumper are not displayed.

● The perceived distance in images displayed on the screen differs from the actual dis-

tance.
■ Images displayed on the screen
Cameras of the Multi-terrain Monitor system use special lenses. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

353

■ Multi-terrain Monitor cameras
● Camera positions

The cameras of the Multi-terrain Monitor system are installed as follows.
1

Side camera (left and right
sides)

Front camera

Rear camera

4
● Using the cameras

NOTICE
■ How to use the cameras
● Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the Multi-terrain

Monitor from operating properly.
• Do not strike the camera area, or allow any objects to bump into it
If the camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact, the camera position, installation angle, etc., may deviate. If the camera is accidentally subjected to
an impact, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.
• Do not remove, disassemble or modify the camera or surrounding parts
Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. This also may result in a loss of
waterproof performance.
• If the camera lens is dirty, follow the above procedures to clean it
If the camera lens is damaged it cannot transmit a clear image.
Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, oil film remover, glass coating, etc. to contact the camera cover
Doing so will negatively affect the camera cover (resin). If this happens, wipe it off
immediately.
• When the outside temperature is cold, do not cause any sudden changes in temperature, such as by applying hot water
● When washing the vehicle, do not apply water with a high-pressure washer to the
camera or surrounding area. Doing so may cause the camera to receive a strong
impact, and the camera may not operate properly

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens with a soft and wet cloth.

354

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Differences between the panoramic view screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines, the combined panoramic view image, guide lines,
etc., indicate estimated distances on a flat road surface. In the following situations, actual distances and vehicle course will differ from the guide lines on the
screen.
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the
actual distance. Therefore, obstacles on an upward slope appear further
away than they actually are. In the same way, the actual course of the vehicle will differ from the course indicated by the guide lines.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

355

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines are displayed further away than the actual distance. Therefore, obstacles on a downward slope appear closer than the
actually are. In the same way, the actual course of the vehicle will differ from
the course indicated by the guide lines.

● When the vehicle is tilted

When the vehicle is tilted due to the number of passengers or weight of the
load, actual distances and vehicle course will differ.
Margin of error

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

356

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Differences between the panoramic view display and actual three-dimen-

sional objects

Be aware of the following points when three-dimensional objects higher than
the surface of the road (such as a vehicle bumper) are nearby.
● Panoramic view display
In the panoramic view, the system processes and displays images under the
assumption that the vehicle is on a flat road surface. Therefore, the position
of three-dimensional objects higher than the road surface (such as a vehicle bumper) cannot be determined. Even if it seems that a collision will not
occur according to the screen, there may not actually be any extra space
between the vehicle and an obstacle higher than the road surface, resulting
in a collision. In these cases, confirm the safety of your surroundings
directly.

WARNING
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display

When the intuitive parking assist pop-up display is red, park the vehicle and make sure
to confirm the safety of your surroundings.
Failure to do so may lead to an unexpected accident.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

357

● Projected course lines

Projected course lines are displayed under the assumption that the vehicle
is on a flat road surface. Therefore, the position of three-dimensional
objects higher than the road surface (such as a vehicle bumper) cannot be
determined. Even if it seems that an obstacle is outside of the projected
course lines and a collision will not occur according to the screen, an
obstacle may actually be in the vehicle course, resulting in a collision.

4
1

Projected course lines

Protrusion of a wall

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Three-dimensional objects in high positions (such as walls with protrusions
or the loading areas of trucks) may not be displayed on the screen. Confirm the safety of your surroundings directly.

358

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Differences between the rear view or wide rear view and actual roads

The guide lines on the screen are intended for flat surfaces (such as the road).
Be aware of the following points when three-dimensional objects with protrusions (obstacles such as the cargo bed of a truck) are nearby.
● Projected course lines
Guide lines are displayed in reference to a level road surface and cannot
be used to determine the location of three-dimensional objects. Confirm
the safety of your surroundings directly. Even if it seems that the cargo bed
of a truck is outside the projected course lines and a collision will not occur
according to the screen, it may actually be in the vehicle course, resulting in
a collision.

Projected course lines

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

359

■ Differences between the panoramic view, rear view and wide rear view and

actual roads
● Distance guide lines

Guide lines are displayed in reference to the road surface and cannot be
used to determine the distance of three-dimensional objects from the vehicle. Confirm the safety of your surroundings directly. On the screen, it
appears that a truck is parking at point 2 according to the distance guide
lines. However, in reality if you back up to point 1 , you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that 1 is closest and 3 is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to 1 and 3 is same, and 2 is farther than 1
and 3 .

Driving

● Under vehicle terrain view

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
weight of the load, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the
surrounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while directly confirming the safety of your surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

360

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Using under vehicle terrain view
● The images displayed were previously taken approximately 10 ft. (3 m) behind the cur-

rent vehicle position.
Therefore, actual conditions may differ from those shown on the screen in the following
situations.
• An obstacle has appeared after the image was taken
• Loose material like sand or snow has crumbled or shifted
• An obstacle has moved
• There is a puddle, tract of mud, etc., within the display range
• The vehicle slips
● In the following situations, actual tire positions and vehicle position may differ from
those indicated by the tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines.
• Tires have been replaced
• Optional equipment has been installed
WARNING
■ Guide lines

The displayed guide lines are composed with the image that was previously taken and
may differ from the actual state.
Always drive the vehicle while confirming your surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

361

■ If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
Likely cause

Solution

 The image is difficult to see
Drive while visually checking the vehicle’s
surroundings. (Use the Multi-terrain
Monitor again once conditions have been
improved.)
The procedure for adjusting the picture
quality of the Multi-terrain Monitor is
same as the procedure for adjusting the
navigation screen. Refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.

 The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water Flush the camera with a large quantity of
droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to water and wipe the camera lens with a
the camera
soft and wet cloth.
 The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
received a strong impact
dealer.
 The guide lines are very far out of alignment
The camera position is out of alignment

Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer.

• The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy
load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low
due to a tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an incline

If this happens due to these causes, it
does not indicate a malfunction.
Drive while visually checking the vehicle’s
surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

• The vehicle is in a dark area
• The temperature around the lens is
either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to
the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights,
sodium lights, mercury lights, etc.

362

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Likely cause

Solution

 The projected course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight (vehicle width extension guide lines and projected course lines are not aligned)
There is a malfunction in the signals being Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
output by the steering sensor
dealer.
 Guide lines are not displayed
The back door is open

Close the back door.
If this does not resolve the symptom, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.

 “!” is displayed
Turn the steering wheel fully to right and
left.
The battery is disconnected and recon- If this does not resolve the symptom, have
nected
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
There is a malfunction in the Multi-terrain Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
Monitor
dealer.
NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The Multi-terrain Monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases.

• If the front or the rear of the vehicle or the outside rear view mirror has been hit,
the camera’s position and mounting angle may have changed.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water
and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause
the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to
the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or
camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
• When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury light
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
• The camera can be damaged by flying rocks and other debris.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this
happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

363

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions:
● The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function
Assists the driver in making a decision when changing lanes
● RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

364

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-information display
The BSM function/RCTA function can be turned on/off. (→P. 365)
The RCTA function is available when the BSM function is on.

Outside rear view mirror indicators
BSM function:
When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or
approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the
detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator will flash.
RCTA function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash.

“BSM” indicator/“RCTA” indicator
When the BSM function/RCTA function is turned on, the indicator illuminates

Monitor screen display (RCTA function only)
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the
RCTA icon (→P. 372) for the detected side will be displayed on the monitor screen.
This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from the left at the rear of
the vehicle.

RCTA buzzer (RCTA function only)
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a
buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1 second immediately
after the BSM function is operated to turn the system on.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

365

Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off
1

Press

of the meter control switches, select

Press

of the meter control switches, select “BSM”, and then press

of the meter control switches, select “BSM” or “RCTA”, and

.
3

Press

then press

■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visibility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.
■ Hearing RCTA buzzer



For vehicles sold in Canada

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises, such as if the audio system
volume is high.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display
Water, snow, mud, etc., may be built up in the vicinity of the sensor area of bumper. (→P. 366)
Removing the water, snow, mud, etc., from the vicinity of the sensor area of bumper should
return it to normal.
Also, the sensor may not function normally when used in extremely hot or cold weather.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor System Malfunction” is shown on the multi-information display
There may be a sensor malfunction or voltage abnormality. Have the vehicle inspected at
your Lexus dealer.
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

366

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
■ Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle
rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
function correctly.
● Keep the sensors and the surrounding areas

on the rear bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear
bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the
Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a
warning message (→P. 365) will be displayed. In this situation, clear off the dirt or
snow and drive the vehicle with the operation
conditions of the BSM function (→P. 369)
satisfied for approximately 10 minutes. If the
warning message does not disappear, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong

impact.
If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.
• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of it has become
disconnected.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Lexus color.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

367

BSM function
The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in
adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the
indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear
view mirrors (the blind spots)

Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible
using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

368

4-5. Using the driving support systems

BSM function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle*

*: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle
cannot be detected.
2

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper*

*: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,
the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror
indicator to illuminate or flash.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the function

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The BSM function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in
a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into
a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the BSM function. As the function cannot judge if it is
safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
As the system may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own
visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

369

■ The BSM function is operational when

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

The BSM function is operational when all of the following conditions are met:
● The BSM function is on.
● The shift lever is in a position other than R.
● The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The BSM function will detect a vehicle when
The BSM function will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situations:
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the BSM function will not detect a vehicle
The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle*
*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

370

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the BSM function may not function correctly
● The BSM function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on
the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather,
such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
• When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your
vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road,
etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle
in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle
• When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
• Immediately after the BSM function is turned on
● Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may
increase in the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the
detection area is short
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road,
etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle
traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or spinning
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

371

RCTA function
The RCTA function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such
vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a
buzzer.

Approaching vehicles

Detection areas of approaching vehicles

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

372

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, the following will be displayed on the monitor screen
Display

Content

A vehicle is approaching from the left at the rear of the vehicle

A vehicle is approaching from the right at the rear of the vehicle

Vehicles are approaching from both sides of the vehicle

The RCTA function is malfunctioning (→P. 365)

WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the function

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the RCTA function
may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident
resulting death or serious injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

373

RCTA function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away.
Example:
1

Approximate
alert distance

Speed

Fast

18 mph (28 km/h)

65 ft. (20 m)

Slow

5 mph (8 km/h)

18 ft. (5.5 m)

■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function operates when all of the following conditions are
met:
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● The vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph
(28 km/h).

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Approaching vehicle

374

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of
vehicles and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to
obstructions

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

375

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function cor-

rectly
● The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following
situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on
the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather,
such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
• When backing up on a slope with a sharp
change in grade

Driving

• When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot

• Immediately after the BSM function is turned on
• Immediately after the engine is started with the BSM function on
• When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle
due to obstructions

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

376

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Instances of the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle

and/or object may increase in the following situations:
• When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle
• When the parking space faces a street and
vehicles are being driven on the street

• When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail,
wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of
the vehicle, is short

Setting up BSM function/RCTA function
You can change the BSM function/RCTA function settings.
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, and then select “Setup” on
the screen.

Select “Vehicle”, and then select “Blind Spot Monitor Settings” on the screen.

Select the desired setting. (→P. 591)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

377

Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however,
that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are
applied while driving on a slippery road surface, or in off-road conditions (such as
rough roads, sand and mud)

◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed
when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
◆ Active TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the 4 wheels from spinning when starting
the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads, or in off-road conditions

◆ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an incline or
slippery slope

◆ AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension system)
By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for each of
the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system helps riding
comfort with superior steering stability, and helps good vehicle posture. When
SPORT S+ mode is selected by the driving mode select switch, the damping force is
suitable for sporty driving. (→P. 284)

◆ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)
Helps to adjust the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and
steering wheel movement.

◆ Trailer Sway Control
Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pressure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer sway is detected.
Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC turned off
or experiences a malfunction.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery
road surfaces

378

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the VSC/Trailer Sway Control/Active TRAC/hill-start assist
control systems are operating
The slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/Trailer Sway Control/Active TRAC/hill-start assist
control systems have been engaged.
The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist
control system or Trailer Sway Control is
operating.

Disabling the Active TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, Active TRAC system reduce
power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to
enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Quickly push and release the button to
turn off Active TRAC.
The TRAC OFF indicator will come on.
Push the button again to turn the system
back on.

■ Turning off Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off
Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control
The VSC OFF indicator light and TRAC OFF indicator will come on.*
Push the button again to turn the system back on.
*: On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on and the message will be
shown on the multi-information display. (→P. 249)
■ Automatic reactivation of Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

Turning the engine switch off after turning off the Active TRAC and VSC systems will
automatically re-enable them.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

379

■ Automatic Active TRAC reactivation

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

If only the Active TRAC system is turned off, the Active TRAC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Automatic Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control reactivation
If the Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are turned off, the systems will not
turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■ If the brake system overheats
The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, and the TRAC OFF
indicator will flash, and Active TRAC and hill-start assist control will be temporarily inoperable. In this event, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake system to cool down sufficiently until the TRAC OFF indicator goes off. (There is no
problem with continuing normal driving.)
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the Multi Terrain ABS, brake assist, Active TRAC,
VSC, Trailer Sway Control, hill-start assist control and VGRS
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just
after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.
None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is activated.
■ Hill-start assist control is operational when
● The shift lever is in D or S.
● The brake pedal is not depressed.
■ VGRS is disabled in the following situations
● During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while driving at
lower speeds.
● After the engine is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).
● If you disconnect the battery with the steering wheel turned, the center position of the
steering wheel could be slightly and temporary changed. To initialize the VGRS, drive
for a short while.

380

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or serious injury:
■ The Multi Terrain ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively
worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the Multi Terrain ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The Multi Terrain ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance.
Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations.
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
■ Active TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the Active TRAC is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not
operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.
■ When Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these
are systems to help to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off Active
TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control unless necessary.
■ When the VSC and Trailer Sway Control are activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator
light flashes.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

381

WARNING
■ Replacing tires

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the specified tire pressure level.
The Multi Terrain ABS, Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control will not function
correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving
assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
■ Trailer Sway Control precaution
The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situations.
Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle, trailer, road surface,
and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control system may not be effective. Refer to
your trailer owner’s manual for information on how to tow your trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce
speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer
should stabilize. (→P. 201)

382

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for
the rear tires.*
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the
tires.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehicles with 21-inch tires

Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any
snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on
the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the
vehicle.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

383

When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle
ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle
● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking

brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If
the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the
wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
● If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift
lever cannot be moved out of P*.

Selecting tire chains


Vehicles with 20-inch tires

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
1

Side chain
(0.20 in. [5 mm] in diameter)

Cross chain
(0.25 in. [6.3 mm] in diameter)



Vehicles with 21-inch tires

Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used instead.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

When the parking brake is in automatic mode, release the parking brake after shifting
the shift lever to P. (→P. 218)
*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position
without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.

384

4-6. Driving tips

Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type
of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains (vehicles with 20-inch tires)
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30
mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations
that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. (if equipped)
■ When installing tire chains (vehicles with 20-inch tires)
Turn off the vehicle height control.
The vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function and you may
catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident. (→P. 298)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

385

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with 20-inch tires)
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire
chains are fitted.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

386

4-6. Driving tips

Off-road precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Off-road vehicle features
● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary

passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be
more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road
allowing you to anticipate problems.
● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may
cause the vehicle to rollover.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

387

WARNING
■ Off-road vehicle precautions

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury
or damage to your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should always fasten
their seat belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity
higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure
to operate this vehicle correctly.
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of
gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car.
Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is
preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much
more easily than forward or backward.

388

4-6. Driving tips

Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to
ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to offroad vehicles:
● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to
travel.
● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private
property.
● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that
restrict travel.
● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques
should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
■ Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the
following organizations:
● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management


LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

389

WARNING
■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury
or damage to your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk
the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud,
water or snow.
● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no
grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody.
Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump,
make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

Driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

390

4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE

■ To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other
components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality,
locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the
gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■ When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of
the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep
water.
■ Inspection after off-road driving
● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may
affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has
taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance
information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

391

Interior features
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch/12.3-inch
display ..........................................392
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge..... 398
5-3. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic air
conditioning system ...............399
Rear air conditioning
system ...........................................410
Heated steering wheel/seat
heaters/seat ventilators......... 413
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 417
• Interior lights ...........................418
• Personal lights ........................ 419

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5
5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features ............420
• Glove box .................................421
• Console box.............................421
• Overhead console .............. 422
• Cup holders ...........................423
• Bottle holders ........................ 424
• Card holder............................ 424
• Auxiliary boxes .....................425
Luggage compartment
features ....................................... 427
5-6. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features ............430
• Cool box..................................430
• Sun visors ................................. 431
• Vanity mirrors ........................ 431
• Clock ........................................432
• Power outlets.........................433
• Wireless charger .................435
• Armrest.................................... 442
• Rear door sunshades .........443
• Coat hooks.............................443
• Assist grips.............................. 444
Garage door opener ...............445
LEXUS Enform Safety
Connect......................................452

392

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch/12.3-inch display
The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Remote Touch screens.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Remote Touch operation

“MAP” button
Press this button to display the vehicle’s current position.

“∧•∨” button
Press this button to change map scale and scroll through lists.

Back button
Press this button to display the previous screen.

“MENU” button
Press this button to display the “Menu” screen.

Remote Touch knob
Move in the desired direction to select a function, letter and screen button.
Press the knob to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.

“ENTER” button
Press this button to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

393

Remote Touch operation
1

Select: Move the Remote Touch
knob in the desired direction.

Enter: Press the Remote Touch knob
or “ENTER” button.

■ Screen display during low temperatures

When the ambient temperature is extremely low, screen response may be delayed even
if the Remote Touch is operated.
WARNING
■ When using the Remote Touch
● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as this

may cause an injury.
● Be careful when selecting the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may
become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.

■ To prevent damage to the Remote Touch
● Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit

cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop functioning.
● Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the knob
may bend or break off.
● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the
Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning.
● Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob.
● If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the engine switch is in
ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

NOTICE

394

5-1. Remote Touch screen

“Menu” screen
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.
The display may differ depending on the type of the system.

When the split-screen display is selected, the “Menu” screen will be displayed on
the main display. (→P. 395)
Switch

Function
Select to display the “Destination” screen.*
Select to display the radio control screen.*
Select to display the media control screen.*
Select to display the hands-free operation screen.*
Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.*
Select to display the “Information” screen.*
Select to display the air conditioning control screen. (→P. 399)
Select to display the “Setup” screen.*

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

395

Switch

Function

“Display”

Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the
screen off, etc.*

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
12.3-inch display operation
■ Full screen display

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

The following functions can be displayed full screen:
● Initial screen
● “Menu” screen (→P. 394)
● Map screen*

396

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Split-screen display

Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For
example, air conditioning system or audio screens can be displayed and operated while the fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The
large screen on the left of the display is called the main display, and the small
screen to the right is called the side display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

397

Split-screen display operation
■ Main Display

For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the
respective section and “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Side Display


Basic screens

To change the screen displayed on the side display, use the screen buttons on
the right side of the display.
1

Navigation system*

Audio*

Phone*

Vehicle information (→P. 105)

Air conditioning system
(→P. 399)



Interruption screens

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

Each of the following screens is displayed automatically in accordance with
conditions.
• Intuitive parking assist (→P. 287)
• Phone*
• Destination Assist
• Driving mode (→P. 284)

398

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge
The seat heaters, seat ventilators and heated steering wheel are each automatically controlled according to the set temperature of the air conditioning
system, the outside and cabin temperature, etc. Lexus Climate Concierge
allows a comfortable condition to be maintained without adjusting each system.
“CLIMATE CONCIERGE” switch
When the switch is pressed, the indicator above the switch illuminates and all
of the following systems operate in automatic mode.
If any of the system is operated manually,
the indicator turns off. However, all
other functions continue to operate in
automatic mode.
■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P. 399, 410)

The temperature can be adjusted individually for the driver seat, passenger seat, and
rear seats.
When a passenger is detected in the second seat, the rear air conditioning operates
in automatic mode.
■ Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped) (→P. 413)

Heating or ventilation is automatically selected according to the set temperature of
the air conditioning system, the outside temperature, etc.
The seat heaters and ventilators of the front passenger seat and second outboard
seats operate in automatic mode if passengers are detected.
■ Heated steering wheel (if equipped) (→P. 413)

Heated steering wheel operates automatically according to the outside temperature
and cabin temperature.
■ Front air conditioning system operation

To improve air conditioning performance in the front seat area, the air outlets on the rear
of the console box may close when there is no passenger in the second seat.
■ Rear air conditioning system operation
The rear air conditioning system may stop automatically when there is no passenger in
the second seat.
■ Seat heater/ventilator operation
When automatic mode is selected using the seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger
detection is not performed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

399

Front automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Select the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select
the air conditioning control screen. (→P. 394)

to display

The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.
(→P. 396)

Control panel

Press

to increase the temperature and

to decrease the tem-

perature.
■ Adjusting the fan speed setting

Press

to increase the fan speed and

speed.
Press

to turn the fan off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

to decrease the fan

Interior features

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

400

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Change the airflow mode

To change the air outlets, press

The air outlets used are switched
each time the button is pressed.
1

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and
feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates

■ Other functions
● Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes (→P. 405)
● Defogging the windshield (→P. 405)
● Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (→P. 405)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

401

Control screen
■ Main display

Left-hand front seat side temperature control

Left-hand front seat side air outlet selector

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates

Fan speed control

Right-hand front seat side air outlet selector

Option control screen

Right-hand front seat side temperature control

Rear air conditioning operation screen

Eco mode

Adjust the temperature for driver, passenger and rear seats separately
(“4-ZONE” mode)

Cooling and dehumidification function on/off

Automatic mode

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

402

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Changing the air flow mode

To adjust settings, select the screen button.
⎯ Air flows to the upper body.
⎯ Air flows to the upper body and feet.
⎯ Air flows to the feet.
⎯ Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.
■ Side display
1

Select the left-hand front seat
side air flow mode

Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting

Adjust the fan speed setting

Select the right-hand front seat
side air flow mode

Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting

Adjust the temperature for driver
and passenger seats separately
(“4-ZONE” mode)

Select to set cooling and dehumidification function on/off

Select to set auto mode on

■ Option control screen

Select
on the main display to display the option control screen. The functions can be switched on and off.
1

Prevent ice from building up on
the windshield and wiper blades
(→P. 405)

Micro dust and pollen filter
(→P. 405)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

403

Air conditioning controls
■ Using the automatic mode
1

Press

or select

on the control screen.

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed
are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
2

Press

to switch to automatic air intake mode.

The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air
and recirculated air modes.
3

Press

or select

to increase the temperature and press

or select

to decrease the temperature.

The temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats can be set separately.
4

To stop the operation, press

■ Automatic mode indicator

Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately
(“4-ZONE” mode)
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time

on the control screen is selected.

Individual mode (the indicator is on.): The temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (→P. 410) can be adjusted separately. Operating the
passenger’s side or rear temperature control will enter individual mode.
In the simultaneous mode, only

(increase) or

(decrease) on the

driver’s side can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode
indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that
operated is maintained.

404

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Changing the rear seat settings
■ Using the automatic mode
1

Select

on the main display.
.
to increase the tem-

perature and
temperature.

to decrease the

■ Adjusting the temperature setting
1

Select

on the main display.
to increase the tem-

perature and
temperature.

to decrease the

Operating the switch will enter individual mode.
1

Left-hand rear seat

Right-hand rear seat

■ Adjusting the fan speed setting
1

Select

on the main display.

Select

to increase the fan speed and

Select

to turn the fan off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

to decrease the fan speed.

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

405

Other functions
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

on the control panel.

The mode switches among

(recirculated air mode), “AUTO” and

(outside air mode) each time

is pressed.

When the system is switched to automatic mode, it operates automatically.
■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Press

on the control panel.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated
air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press
again when the windshield is
defogged.

■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

Press
Press

on the control panel.
again to turn the defogger off.

■ Micro dust and pollen filter

Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Select

on the option control screen.

In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
dehumidification function may operate.
The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Select

on the option control screen.

When the windshield wiper de-icer is on, the indicator turns on.
The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window and to remove raindrops, dew
and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

406

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air outlets
■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the selected
air flow mode.

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets


Front side



Rear



Front center

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or close the vent

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

407

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately
after the

is pressed or

on the control screen is selected.

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
● In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize

fuel efficiency
• Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
• Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
● To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations
• Adjust the fan speed
• Turn off Eco mode
■ Using the voice command system
Air conditioning system can be operated using voice commands. For details, refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting
will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn

■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recircu-

lated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the
recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system
is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system
may switch to recirculated air mode automatically.
This may also reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification function.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

408

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ When the outside temperature is low

The dehumidification function may not operate even when

is selected.

■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the fol-

lowing may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
■ The rear window defogger, outside rear view mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the
vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior
to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately
after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
■ While the cool box is on (if equipped)
The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 501
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not use

during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
■ To prevent burns
● Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.
● Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars
when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

409

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.

Interior features

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

410

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
The rear air conditioning operation switches are on the second seat armrest.
(→P. 442)

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

Press

to increase the temperature and

to decrease the tem-

perature.
■ Adjusting the fan speed setting

Press

to increase the fan speed and

Press

to turn the fan off.

to decrease the fan speed.

■ Changing the air flow mode

Press

The air flow mode switches each time the button is pressed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

411

Air conditioning controls
■ Using the automatic mode
1

Press the

Adjust the temperature setting.

To stop the operation, press the

■ If the system is operated manually in automatic mode

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode
indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that
operated are maintained.

Air outlets
■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the selected
air flow mode.

Interior features

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
1

Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.

Turn the knob fully to the back of
the vehicle to close the vent.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

412

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

413

Heated steering wheel∗/seat heaters/seat
ventilators∗
Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering
wheel and seats. Seat ventilators maintain good airflow by blowing air from
the seats.
WARNING
● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in

contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
● Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheating:
• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.
• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick

sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is off.

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

NOTICE

414

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Heated steering wheel (if equipped)


Automatic operation

Operates automatically according to
the outside and cabin temperature
when “CLIMATE CONCIERGE”
switch is on. (→P. 398) Automatic
operation can be turned off using the
switch.
The indicator light comes on when the
heated steering wheel is operating.


Manual operation

Turns the heated steering wheel on/off
The indicator light comes on when the heated steering wheel is operating.
■ The heated steering wheel can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Timer function

Automatic operation: Operates for a maximum of 30 minutes.
(Turns off according to outside and cabin temperature.)
Manual operation: Turns off after approximately 30 minutes.
■ If the indicator light flashes
Press the switch to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the switch again. If
the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the heated steering
wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
The automatic turning on/off of the heated steering wheel can be customized. (Customizable features →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

415

Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)


Front seats



Second outboard seats

Seat heater switches
The indicator light (yellow) on the switch comes on when the seat heater is operating.

Seat ventilator switches (if equipped)
The indicator light (green) on the switch comes on when the seat ventilator is operating.

Level indicator lights
The seat heater temperature level or the seat ventilator fan speed level (if equipped) is
displayed.

“AUTO” indicator lights

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

416

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Modes and indicators

The mode can be changed by pressing the switch.
Mode

“AUTO” indicator light

Level indicator lights

Off

Automatic*

3 to 1, or off

Off

Mid

Off

*: When automatic mode is selected, the level automatically changes depending on the
air conditioning settings.
■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Replacing the air filters

Filters are installed in the seat ventilators. For replacement of the filters, contact your
Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
The automatic mode settings for the seat heaters and ventilators can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-4. Using the interior lights

417

Interior lights list

Rear interior lights (→P. 418)

Footwell lights

Rear personal lights (→P. 419)

Scuff lights (if equipped)

Inside door handle light

Engine switch light

Front interior lights (→P. 418)

Door courtesy light

Front personal lights (→P. 419)

Luggage compartment light (if
equipped)

Shift lever light (when the engine
switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI- 12 Outer foot lights
TION ON mode)
13 Running board lights
14

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Door trim lights

Interior features

418

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights


Front

On/off (touch the light)

Door position on/off



Rear

On/door position on

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-4. Using the interior lights

419

Personal lights


Front

Turns the lights on/off (touch the lights)



Rear

Turns the lights on/off

■ Illuminated entry system

NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the presence of the
electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are
open/closed.
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off
automatically after 20 minutes:
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. adjust the time elapsed before the interior lights automatically turn off) can
be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 580)

420

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Auxiliary boxes (→P. 425)

Card holder (→P. 424)

Overhead console (→P. 422)

Glove box (→P. 421)

Bottle holders (→P. 424)

Door pockets

Cup holders (→P. 423)

Console box (if equipped)
(→P. 421)
Cool box (if equipped) (→P. 430)

Auxiliary box (if equipped)
(→P. 425)
Wireless charger (if equipped)
(→P. 435)

WARNING
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the
following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other
stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items,
the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

421

Glove box
1

Open (push button)

Unlock with the mechanical key

Lock with the mechanical key

■ Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
■ Removing the separate tray
Pull out the separate tray while releasing the
clips.

Keep the glove box closed while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Console box (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with either a console box or cool box.
For vehicles with the cool box, refer to page 430.
1

Press the button to open the lid.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

WARNING

422
2

5-5. Using the storage features

Remove the tray.

WARNING
Keep the console box closed while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Overhead console
Press the button.

WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for storing

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside may fall out,
resulting in an accident.
■ While driving
Do not leave the overhead console open.
Items may fall out and cause injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

423

Cup holders


Front seats

Press down and release the lid.



Third seats (if equipped)



Second seats

To open, pull down the armrest, press
the button and release the rear cup
holder on the armrest.


Luggage
equipped)

compartment

(if
5

Interior features

WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Even when
the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking, and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

424

5-5. Using the storage features
NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the cup holders

Stow the cup holders before stowing the rear armrest.

Bottle holders


Front seats



Second seats

NOTICE
■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders,
or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may
break.

Card holder

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

425

Auxiliary boxes
Your vehicle is equipped with either a front auxiliary box type B or wireless charger.
For vehicles with wireless charger, refer to page 435.
■ Front seats


Type A

Press the button to open.



Type B (if equipped)

Press the lid to open.

Interior features

■ Second seats
1

Pull down the armrest.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

426

5-5. Using the storage features
2

Press the button to release the
lock.

■ Third seats /luggage compartment

WARNING
■ While driving

For the front seats and the second seats: Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items stored in it may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

427

Luggage compartment features
Cargo hooks
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.

Cargo net hooks
To hang the cargo net, use the cargo
net hooks and rear tie-down hooks.
The cargo net itself is not included as an
original equipment.

Remove the cover.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

Storage compartment (if equipped)

428

5-5. Using the storage features

Warning reflector holder
Remove the cover. Hold the warning
reflector with the bands.
The warning reflector itself is not
included as an original equipment.

First-aid kit holder
Remove the cover. Hold the first-aid kit
with a band.
The first-aid kit itself is not included as an
original equipment.

Luggage cover (if equipped)
■ Using the luggage cover

Pull out the luggage cover and hook
it on the anchors.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

429

■ Removing the luggage cover

Retract the cover and release both
ends, then lift it out.
After removing the luggage cover,
place it somewhere other than the
passenger compartment.

■ When installing the luggage cover (if equipped)

Keep the “TOP” mark on the luggage cover
ends upward.

5
WARNING
● Keep the auxiliary box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an

accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the
items stored inside.
● Vehicles with luggage cover: Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover.
Climbing on the luggage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly
causing death or serious injury to the child.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks

Avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

● To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when not in use.

430

5-6. Using the other interior features

Other interior features
Cool box (if equipped)
While the engine is running, the cool box, which is cooled by the air conditioning,
can be used.
1

Press the button to open the lid.

Turns the cool box on/off
When on, the indicator light comes on.

■ While the cool box is on

The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.
■ When the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below

The cool box may not operate.
WARNING
Keep the cool box closed while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the cool box on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

431

Sun visors


Main sun visor

To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position,
flip down, unhook, and swing it to the
side.

To use the side extender, place the
visor in the side position, then slide it
backward.



Sub sun visor

Flip down with the main sun visor in
position 2 or 3 .

Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.

If the vanity lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off
automatically after 20 minutes.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods
when the engine is not running.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

Vanity mirrors

432

5-6. Using the other interior features

Clock
The GPS clock’s time is automatically
adjusted by utilizing GPS time information. For details, refer to “NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
OWNER’S
MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

433

Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for the following components:
12 V DC: Accessories that run on less than 10 A
120 V AC: Accessories that use less than 100 W
■ Center of console


Front (12 V DC)

Press the lid to open.

Interior features



Rear (12 V DC)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

434

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ Luggage compartment (120 V AC)

■ The power outlet can be used when

12 V DC: The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
120 V AC: The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V DC: Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 V AC: Do not use a 120 V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 120 V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit
will cut the power supply.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 V AC)
The following 120 V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W:
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

435

Wireless charger (if equipped)
A portable device can be charged by just placing Qi standard wireless charge
compatible portable devices according to the Wireless Power Consortium, such
as smart phones and mobile batteries, etc., on the charge area.
This function cannot be used with portable devices that are larger than the
charging area. Also, depending on the portable device, it may not operate as
normal. Please read the operation manual for portable devices to be used.
■ The “Qi” symbol

The “Qi” symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consortium.

■ Name for all parts
1

Power supply switch

Operation indicator light

Charge area

Interior features

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

436

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ Using the wireless charger
1

Press the lid to open.

Press the power supply switch of
the wireless charger.
Switches on and off with each press
of the power supply switch.
When turned on, the operation indicator light (green) comes on.
Even with the engine off, the on/off
state of the power supply switch is
memorized.

Place the charging side of the
portable device down.
When charging, the operation indicator light (orange) comes on.
If charging is not occurring, try placing the portable device as close to
the center of the charging area as
possible.
When charging is complete, the
operation indicator light (green)
comes on.

● Recharging function

• When charging is complete and after a fixed time in the charge suspension state, charging restarts.
• When the portable device is moved, charging is stopped for a moment
and then it restarts.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

437

■ Lighting conditions of operation indicator light

Operation indicator light
Turning off
Green (comes on)

Orange (comes on)

Conditions
When the Wireless charger power supply is off
On Standby (charging possible state)
When charging is complete*
When placing the portable device on the charging
area (detecting the portable device)
Charging

*: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation indicator
light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is complete.
● When the operation indicator light flashes

When an error occurs, the operation indicator light flashes an orange color.
Handle the error based on the following table.
Operation indicator light

Suspected causes

Handling method

Flashing repeatedly once Vehicle to charger commu- Contact your Lexus dealer.
every second (Orange) nication failure.

Remove the foreign subA foreign substance is stance from between porbetween the portable device
table device and the
Repeatedly
flashes and charge area.
charge area.
3 times
continuously
(Orange)
The portable device is out of Place the portable device
sync due to the device being near the center of the
shifted from its position.
charge area.

Interior features

Repeatedly
flashes
Stop charging at once and
4 times
continuously Temperature rising within start charging again after
the wireless charger.
(Orange)
for a while.
■ The wireless charger can be operated when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ Usable portable devices

Qi standard wireless charge standard can be used on compatible devices.
However, not all Qi standard devices and compatibility are guaranteed.
Starting with mobile phones and smart phones, it is aimed for low power electrically supplied portable devices of no more than 5W.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

438

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ When covers and accessories are attached to portable devices

Do not charge in situations where cover and accessories not able to handle Qi are
attached to the portable device. Depending on the type of cover and accessory, it may
not be possible to charge. When charging is not performed even with the portable
device placed on the charge area, remove the cover and accessories.
■ While charging, noise enters the AM radio
Turn off the wireless charger and confirm that the noise has decreased. If the noise
decreases, continuously pushing the power supply switch of the wireless charger for 2
seconds, the frequency of the charger can be changed and the noise can be reduced.
Also, on that occasion, the operation indicator light will flash orange 2 times.
■ Important points of the wireless charger
● If the electronic key cannot be detected within the vehicle interior, charging cannot be
done. When the door is opened and closed, charging may be temporarily suspended.
● When charging, the wireless charging device and portable device will get warmer,
however this is not a malfunction.
When a portable device gets warm while charging, charging may stop due to the protection function on the portable device side. In this case, when the temperature of the
portable device drops significantly, charge again.
■ Operation sounds
When the power supply is turned on, while searching for the portable device a sound will
be produced, however this is not a malfunction.
■ Certification for the wireless charger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

439

Interior features

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

440

5-6. Using the other interior features
WARNING

■ Caution while driving

When charging a portable device, for safety reasons, the driver should not operate the
portable device while driving.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapypacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators, as well as any other electrical
medical device, should consult their physician about the usage of the wireless charger.
The operations of the wireless charger may have an affect on medical devices.
■ To prevent damage or burns
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in a possibility of equipment failure and damage, catch fire,
burns due to overheat.
● Do not insert any metallic objects between the charging area and the portable device
while charging
● Do not attach stickers, metallic objects, etc., to the charger area or portable device
● Do not cover with cloth, etc., and charge
● Do not charge portable devices other than designated
● Do not attempt to dismantle for disassembly or modifications
● Do not hit or apply a strong force

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

441

WARNING
■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

In the following conditions, the wireless charger may not operate correctly
● The portable device is fully charged
● There is foreign matter between the charge area and portable device
● The temperature of the portable device gets higher from charging
● The charging surface of the portable device is facing up
● The placement of the portable device is out of alignment with the charge area
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport
or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
In addition, excluding the above-mentioned, when the charger does not perform normally or the operation indicator light is flashing continuously, it is considered that the
wireless charger is malfunctioning. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ To prevent failure or damage to data
● Do not bring magnetic cards, such as credit cards, or magnetic recording media, etc.,
close to the charger while charging, otherwise, data may disappear under the influence of magnetism. Also, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches,
etc., close to the charger, as such objects may break.
● Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the cabin may
become high, when under the sun, and cause damage to the device.
■ To prevent battery discharge
When the engine is stopped, do not use the wireless charger for a long time.

442

5-6. Using the other interior features

Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.

NOTICE
To prevent damage, do not apply too much load on the armrest.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

443

Rear door sunshades
Pull the tab of the rear door sunshade
and hook the shade on using the
anchor.
To retract the rear door sunshade,
unhook the shade and retract it slowly.

NOTICE
To ensure normal operation of the rear door sunshade, observe the following precautions.
● Do not place anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of the sunshade.
● Do not attach anything to the rear door sunshade.
● Do not retract the rear door sunshade at an angle.

Coat hooks

WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

The coat hooks are provided with the
second seat assist grips.

444

5-6. Using the other interior features

Assist grips
An assist grip (Type A) can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.
An assist grip (Type B) can be used when getting in or out of the vehicle and others.
1

Assist grip (Type A)

Assist grip (Type B)

WARNING
Do not use the assist grip (Type A) when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from
your seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage, do not hang heavy objects or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

445

Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates,
entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other
devices.

Programming HomeLink®
The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can
be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the
device.
1

HomeLink® indicator light

Garage door operation indicators

HomeLink® icon
Illuminates while HomeLink® is operating.

Buttons

● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other

devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects
are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other
potential harm.
● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control
transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped
with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder
or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the
garage door opener motor.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

■ Before programming HomeLink®

446

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ Programming the HomeLink®

Steps 1 through 3 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the
indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed.
1

Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program and check
that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes (orange).

Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view
mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light
in view while programming.

Program a device.


Programming a device other
than an entry gate (for U.S.A.
owners)

Press and hold the remote control
transmitter button until the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing green
(rolling code) or continuously lit
green (fixed code), then release
the button.


Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device
in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly
flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continuously
lit (green) (fixed code).
4

Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button
and observing the indicator light:
● Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

447

● Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other

device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly
press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then release it.
● If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to “Programming a rolling code system”.
5

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining
HomeLink® buttons.

■ Programming a rolling code system

2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.
1

Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.

Press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds
after performing 2 .

Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this sequence
(press/hold/release) up to 3
times to complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor
operates when the HomeLink®
button is pressed, the garage
door opener motor recognizes
the HomeLink® signal.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

448

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for com-

patible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the
opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used
is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
1

Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been
completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink®,
both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the
light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2way communication is enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of
the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed.
2

Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage door.

Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door
operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage
door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage
door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is
enabled.

■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have
devices registered to them can be overwritten:
1

With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.

When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing (orange), continue to hold
the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” 1 (it
takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing).

Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light
should turn on.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

449

Garage door operation indicators
The status of the opening and closing of
a garage door is shown by the indicators.
1

Opening

Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is a
compatible device. (To check device
compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
Color

Status

Orange (flashing)

Currently opening/closing

Green

Opening/closing has completed

Red (flashing)

Feedback signals cannot be received

Link® buttons

and

simultaneously. The

last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for
10 seconds until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from continuously
lit (orange) to rapidly flashing (green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink®
memory.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the
garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and
the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door
may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either Home-

450

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory
● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.

● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already

has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.

■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.

● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®.
■ Certification for the garage door opener


For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico



For vehicles sold in Canada

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/lexus or call 1-800-355-3515.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

451

WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of
danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or
device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or programming HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.

Interior features

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

452

5-6. Using the other interior features

LEXUS Enform Safety Connect∗
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide
safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by
Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days
per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as
in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available
at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such thenapplicable Terms and Conditions.

System components
1

Microphone

LED light indicators

“SOS” button

∗: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

453

Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers.
(→P. 454)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P. 454)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P. 455)
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P. 455)

Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are
enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

■ Safety Connect Services Information

● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety

Connect.

● Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics

device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite
signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive
emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription
term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location
will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and
Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except Hawaii) and in
Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act
and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety
Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus
dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the “SOS” button in
your vehicle for further subscription details.

454

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
■ Safety Connect backup battery depletion

An exclusive backup battery is built in to assist the Automatic Collision Notification,
which is activated when impact above a certain level is applied to the vehicle, or when the
airbags operate. This battery is a primary battery, and cannot be recharged. The red LED
indicator will flash to indicate that the battery should be replaced.
The backup battery will need to be replaced if the Automatic Collision Notification operates for 60 seconds or more. For replacement, consult your Lexus dealer.

Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light
comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact
your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is
designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the
nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests
that assistance be sent to the location.
■ Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to
assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report,
call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-2553987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle,
Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

455

■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the
Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your
vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you
are not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect responsecenter agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat
tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services
and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions,
which are available at Lexus.com.

Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

■ Exposure to radio frequency signals

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted
RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)
Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection)
[1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of
the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries
reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to
those standards.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio
transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF)
signals.

456

5-6. Using the other interior features

■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

457

Maintenance and care

6
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ................458
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior................... 461
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ............................464
General maintenance..............466
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs....................................469
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................470
Hood ............................................... 472
Engine compartment ............... 473
Tires .................................................486
Tire inflation pressure...............495
Wheels ...........................................499
Air conditioning filter ................ 501
Electronic key battery..............503
Checking and replacing
fuses............................................. 505
Light bulbs.................................... 508

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

458

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel
●
●
●
●

wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the

vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your

vehicle’s paint.

● Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an

increased risk of damage to vehicle.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
■ Wheels (including surrounding parts)
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or
abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild
detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for
long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

459

■ Notes for a smart access system with push-button start
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,

the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more
separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that
the key is not stolen.)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car
wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will
sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the
electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or
other serious injuries and cause damage to the
wiper blades.

OFF
AUTO

● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is

touched by hand

● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop

sensor

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
■ Precautions regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction.
If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

● If something bumps against the windshield

460

6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum

wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low
humidity when storing wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact
with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

461

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it
in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth

dampened with lukewarm water.
● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral
detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining
traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted deter-

gent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remain-

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to

approximately 1%.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining

traces of detergent and water.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

ing traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area.

462

6-1. Maintenance and care

■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain
the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to
apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. The excellent results are
obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts
periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 40)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior

or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or
acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s
painted surface may be damaged.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

463

NOTICE
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the
vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they
may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Lexus Safety System +)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (→P. 245)
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact
with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the
vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear quarter windows and rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear quarter windows and rear window, as this
may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window
in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
6

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

464

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks.
Lexus recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by
yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to
the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and
Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-2. Maintenance

465

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance
of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than
a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule,
please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedures described below:
1

Press

of the meter control switches, select

Press

of the meter control switches, select “Scheduled Maintenance” and

then press
.
Select the “Yes” and press
.
4 A message is displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operation of all systems on your
vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
3

WARNING

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component
wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area
immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds
which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P. 482)

466

6-2. Maintenance

General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at
the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should
be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for
advice.

Engine compartment
Items

Check points

Battery

Check the connections.

(→P. 482)

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?

(→P. 479)

Engine coolant

Is the engine coolant at the correct level? (→P. 478)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

Power steering fluid

Is the power steering fluid at the correct level?
(→P. 481)

Radiator/condenser

The radiator and condenser should be free from
foreign objects.
(→P. 479)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

(→P. 475)

(→P. 485)

6-2. Maintenance

467

Vehicle interior
Items

Check points
• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly
(without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Automatic transmission
“Park” mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is
the vehicle securely stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance
from the floor?
(→P. 564)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of
free play?
(→P. 564)

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the
brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor
when the brakes are applied.

Head restraints

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock
securely?

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Lights

• Do all the lights come on?

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of
free play?
• There should not be any strange sounds coming
from the steering wheel.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Accelerator pedal

468

6-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior
Items

Check points

Doors

• Do the doors operate smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after
the vehicle has been parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or excessively
worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

Windshield wipers/rear
window wiper

• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the windshield/rear
window without streaking or skipping.

WARNING
■ If the engine is running

Turn off the engine and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-2. Maintenance

469

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of
the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission
control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be
repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction
and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven
40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

470

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures
as given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
(→P. 482)
Brake fluid level
(→P. 479)

Engine coolant level
(→P. 478)

Parts and tools
• Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and
non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50 %
coolant and 50 % deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55 %
coolant and 45 % deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

Engine oil level
(→P. 475)
Fuses (→P. 505)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

• Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
Power steering fluid • Rag or paper towel
level (→P. 481)
• Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid)
Radiator and
condenser
(→P. 479)

⎯

Tire inflation
pressure (→P. 495) • Tire pressure gauge
Washer fluid
(→P. 485)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

• Compressed air source

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

471

WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly,
become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe
the following precautions:
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving
as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and
battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the
electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or
the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 479)
■ When working on or under the vehicle
Do not get under the vehicle with just the jack supporting it.
Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in
your eyes.

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt
in the air.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

NOTICE

472

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1

Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.

Lift the hood catch and lift the hood.

WARNING
■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause
an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

473

Engine compartment

Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 479)

Fuse box

(→P. 505)

Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 475)

Washer fluid tank

(→P. 485)

Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 478)

Battery

(→P. 482)

Cooling fans

Engine oil filler cap

Condenser

(→P. 479)

Radiator

(→P. 479)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

(→P. 476)

Maintenance and care

Power steering fluid reservoir
(→P. 481)

474

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover

■ Installing the clips
1

Push up center portion

Insert

Press

NOTICE
■ After installing an engine compartment cover

Make sure the cover is securely installed in its original position.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

475

Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on
the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
1

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning
it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.

Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.
1

Low

Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

476

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of the
same type as already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding
oil.
Engine oil selection

→P. 560

Oil quantity (Low → Full)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Items

Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations,
oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil
maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after
replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
■ After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
1

Press

press
.
Select the “Yes” and press
.
A message is displayed on the multi-information display.

of the meter control switches, select

of the meter control switches, select “Oil Maintenance” and then

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

477

WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin dis-

orders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of
used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus
dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
6

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

478

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
1

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant up to the “F” line.

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50 % coolant and 50 % deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55 % coolant and 45 % deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock
and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check
for leaks in the cooling system.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap, or the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

479

NOTICE
■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and
antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damage to parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries,
such as burns.

Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
on the tank.

480

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Items

Clean funnel

■ Refilling brake fluid
1

Turn the engine switch off.

Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.

Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.
If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only
newly opened brake fluid.
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If
you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when
the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may
indicate a serious problem.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

481

Power steering fluid
■ Fluid level

The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
1

Full (when cold)

Add fluid (when cold)

Full (when hot)

Add fluid (when hot)

Hot:

The vehicles has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures.
(Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C]).

Cold: The engine has not been run for about 5 hours.
(Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C]).
■ Checking the fluid level

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

Items

Rag or paper, clean funnel (only for adding fluid)

Clean all dirt off the reservoir.

Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinstall the cap and remove it again.

Check the fluid level.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Fluid type

482

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING

■ When checking the reservoir

Take care as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■ When adding fluid

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■ After replacing the reservoir cap

Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no
loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

483

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive.
Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground
cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting
the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be
possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not
start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from
the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the
vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was
disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take
extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is
unknown.
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.

WARNING
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take
the following precautions while working on or near battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

■ Chemicals in the battery

484

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING

■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to
the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention
immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories
are turned off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

485

Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or “Windshield Washer Fluid Low” appears on
the multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.

WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains
alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surface, as well as damaging the
pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

486

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires
for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread. Check the
spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc., molded
on the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,
Lexus recommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same interval as tire
inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Front

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

487

Tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before
serious problems arise.
● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by
a screen display and a warning light. (→P. 522)
● The tire pressure detected by the

tire pressure warning system can be
displayed on the multi-information
display. (→P. 91)

◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
must also be installed.

◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circum-

stances:
● When rotating the tires in above situation.
● When the set tire pressure has been changed before towing. (→P. 565)

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation
pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID
codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 488)

488

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1

Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch to off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moved.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. (→P. 565)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
“--” will be displayed for inflation
pressure of each tire on the multiinformation display while the tire
pressure warning system determines
the position of each tire.
When position of each tire is determined, the inflation pressure of each tire will be
displayed on the multi-information display.

Drive the vehicle at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 minutes.
When initialization is complete, the inflation pressure of each tire will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
Initialization will take longer than approximately 10 minutes if the vehicle is
stopped for a long time, such as at traffic signals.

◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID
code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

489

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and
bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of
a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire
pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the
tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom
or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks.
Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement
tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle
or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For
the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit
at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P. 569)

490

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire types
● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under
dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as
snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For
driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended.
When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for
driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy
or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If
you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make
sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed
on all wheels. (→P. 382)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the
specified level.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains etc. are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
• If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.
• If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put near the
spare tire.
• If tires not equipped with the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered
in the tire pressure warning computer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

491

● Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions,
the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.
● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be
extended.
● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the
warning may not function.
■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the
engine switch has been turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time.
● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the
tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.
● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not
being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops,
the tire pressure warning light will come on.
6

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

492

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated
attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light
does not blink 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
If the inflation of each tire is not displayed after driving for approximately 1 hour, perform
the following procedure.
● Park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes. Then drive straight (with
occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for
approximately 10 to 20 minutes.
However, in the following situations, the tire inflation pressure will not be recorder and
the system will not operate properly. Perform initialization.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light
does not blink 3 times.
● After performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then
stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
If the inflation pressure of each tire is still not displayed, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico and NATO Germany
FCC ID: PAXPMVC015
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Model: PMV-C015
NOTE
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

493

WARNING
■ Tire pressure warning system operation

The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire bursts
or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may
not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire
inflation pressure is actually normal.

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

494

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water
could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves
could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified.
The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or
other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 487)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning
ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires
themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

495

Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure and tire size are displayed on
the tire and loading information label.
(→P. 565)

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

496

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Inspection and adjustment procedure
1

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment,
apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

497

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do
not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated
in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
6

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

498

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could
lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/ or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion
joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air
leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

499

Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling
control.

Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent
to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your alumi-

num wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are

● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber

hammer when balancing your wheels.

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event
of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 487)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

500

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING

■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s

Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing

so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■ Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified
service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

501

Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain
air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method
1

Turn the engine switch IGNITION ON mode and switch to recirculated air
mode, then turn the engine switch off.

Open the glove box and remove the separate tray. (→P. 421)

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the filter case.

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

502

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing
compressed air through the filter from
the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or
bar).
If it is not available, have the filter
cleaned by your Lexus dealer.

Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning filter and
replace it with a new one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter
should be pointing up.

■ Checking interval

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early
replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the system
● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

503

Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR2032)

Replacing the battery
1

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the
tip of the flathead screwdriver with a
tape.

Remove the depleted battery.
When removing the cover, if the battery
cannot be seen due to the electronic key
module attaching to the upper cover,
remove the electronic key module from
the cover so that the battery is visible as
shown in the illustration.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

504

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or

camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not
function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away
from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

505

Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If
this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the fuse box cover.



Engine compartment

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.


Passenger’s side instrument panel

Remove the cover.



Driver’s side instrument panel

Remove the lid.
6

Maintenance and care

Remove the lid.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

506
3

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed using
the pull-out tool.

Check if the fuse is blown.
1

Normal fuse

Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Lexus dealer.



Type A



Type B



Type C



Type D

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

507

■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need

replacement. (→P. 508)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object
in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or the fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer,
as soon as possible.

Maintenance and care

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

508

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs
If any lights burn out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.
■ LED lights

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.
● Headlights
● Parking lights/daytime running lights
● Front side marker lights
● Fog lights
● Front turn signal lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Outer foot lights
● Rear turn signal lights
● High mounted stoplight
● Stop/tail lights
● License plate lights
● Stop lights
● Back-up lights
● Rear side marker lights
● Running board light
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations:
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
WARNING
■ Handling lights

Do not touch the lights while they are on or immediately after they have been turned
off. Doing so may result in burns.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

509

When trouble arises

7
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ................... 510
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.......511
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................. 512
If you think something is
wrong............................................ 518
Fuel pump shut off system....... 519
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds..........................................520
If a warning message is
displayed.....................................528
If you have a flat tire ..................532
If the engine will not start ........544
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............546
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.................................549
If your vehicle overheats.........552
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................................555

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

510

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has
to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.

■ Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the
battery may discharge.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-1. Essential information

511

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in
the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
2

Shift the shift lever to N.



If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the engine.



If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as
much as possible.

To stop the engine, press and hold
the engine switch for 2 consecutive
seconds or more, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
WARNING

■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

512

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or
flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and
local laws.
If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly.
(→P. 513, 516)

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

513

Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck


From the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.



From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

514

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Using a flatbed truck
If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the
locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down
your vehicle, the angles shaded in black
must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or
the vehicle may be damaged.

Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily
towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing hooks. This
should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 50 miles (80 km)
at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s
wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

515

Emergency towing procedure
1

Securely attach cables or chains to
the towing hooks.
Take care not to damage the vehicle
body.

Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Shift the four-wheel drive control switch to “H4”. (The center differential is
unlocked.)

Change the vehicle height to N (normal) mode and press the height control
OFF button to end the vehicle height control operation. (→P. 298)

Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: →P. 215

■ While towing

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function,
making steering and braking more difficult.
7

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

516

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground, the
drivetrain or related parts may be damaged,
the vehicle may fly off the truck.

■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive

stress on the towing hooks, cables or chains. The towing hooks, cables or chains may
become damaged, broken debris may hit people and cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the engine switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

517

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock

mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the oppo-

site end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not use the rear emergency towing hook.

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

518

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
●
●
●
●

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal
Engine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than normal
Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal

Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

519

Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
1

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.

Restart the engine.
NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and
is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

520

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or
flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light

Warning light/Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that:
• The brake fluid level is low; or
• The brake system is malfunctioning.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

(Canada)

Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Lexus dealer.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The emission control system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light

521

Warning light/Details/Actions
PCS warning light (if equipped)

(Flashes or illuminates)

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that
the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being
extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc. (→P. 260,
528)
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P. 260, 528)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.
→ P. 260

Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The Multi-terrain Select;
• The Crawl Control;
• The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;
• Active TRAC (Traction Control) system;
• Trailer Sway Control; or
• The hill-start assist control system
The light will flash when any of the above systems other than the
Multi-terrain Select are operating.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

522

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light

(Flashes)

Warning light/Details/Actions
Low speed four-wheel drive indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system if the light
continues flashing. (→P. 303)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Center differential lock indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system if the light
continues flashing. (→P. 303)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*2
Indicates that a door is not fully closed
→ Check that all the doors are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 4.0 gal. (15.0 L,
3.3 Imp.gal.) or less
→ Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*3
Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.
→ Fasten the seat belt.

(On the center panel)

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*3
Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.
→ Fasten the seat belt.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on or flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
→ P. 528
Tire pressure warning light
Indicates that:
• Flat tire
• Natural causes
• The tire pressure warning system is malfunctioning
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (→P. 525)
Power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the power steering system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)

(Flashes)
(Canada)

Parking brake indicator
Indicates that the parking brake is not fully engaged or released
→ Operate the parking brake switch once again.
This light comes on when the parking brake is not released.*4 If the
light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is
operating normally.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light

523

Warning light/Details/Actions
Brake system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the electric parking brake system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

*1: Brake system warning buzzer:
The buzzer sounds to indicate that the brake fluid level is low (with the vehicle
reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

*2: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not fully
closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3mph [5 km/h]).

*3: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not
fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer
sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer
sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound
intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will
sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will
sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer
will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*4: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle
having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

524

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side
impact sensors (rear), side impact sensors (front door), safing sensor (rear), driver’s seat
belt buckle switch, driver’s seat position sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights, seat belt pretensioners
and force limiters. (→P. 38)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor
may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
■ If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator
light blinks
Take the specified steps. (→P. 305)
If the brake system warning light or the malfunction indicator light also comes on, or the
low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator light
continues to blink after taking the specified steps, there may be a malfunction in the
engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be able
to transfer between “H4” and “L4” modes, and the center differential lock may not be
able to be locked or unlocked. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer, immediately.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

525

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.
If a tire is punctured: →P. 532
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the engine switch off then turn it to IGNITION ON mode. Check if the tire pressure
warning light comes on or flashes.
 If the tire pressure warning light comes on
1 After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure
of each tire and adjust them to the specified level.
2 If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check
that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform initialization.
(→P. 487)
If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
 If the tire pressure warning light flashes for 1 minute then stay on
There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks
or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire
inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The
tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If
a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure
warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the
proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
→P. 490
■ Changing the engine oil
Make sure to reset oil change system
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.

526

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to
the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose
control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

527

WARNING
■ Maintenance of the tires

NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning
system may not operate properly.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning
light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
(tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function
properly.

528

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed
The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure
appropriate to the message.
1

Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on
or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
instrument cluster.

Multi-information display

Handling Method
Follow the instructions of the message
on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning messages are shown again after the following actions have
been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

529

Messages and warnings
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the
content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a
dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
System
warning
light

Warning
buzzer*

Comes on

Sounds

Comes on

⎯

Sounds

⎯

Comes on
or flashes

Sounds

Indicates an important situation, such as
when the systems shown on the multi-information display may be malfunctioning

Flashes

⎯

Sounds

Indicates a situation, such as when damage
to the vehicle or danger may result

Comes on

⎯

Does not
sound

Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of
electrical components, their condition, or
indicates the need for maintenance

Flashes

⎯

Does not
sound

Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly

Warning

Indicates an important situation, such as
when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed

*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.
The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following case. Instead, a separate system warning light will come on along with a message or image shown on the
multi-information display.
● Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is not currently functional
The PCS warning light comes on. (→P. 521)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

■ System warning lights

530

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If “See Owner’s Manual” is shown
● If “Smart Access System Malfunction” is shown, this may be a malfunction.

Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● If “Transmission Fluid Temp High” is shown, it indicates that the automatic transmission

fluid temperature is too high.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to P and wait until the
warning message and light go off. If the warning message and light go off, you may
start the vehicle again. If the warning message and light do not go off, contact your
Lexus dealer.
■ If “Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle” is shown
Message is displayed when the driver’s door is opened without turning the engine switch
to off with the shift lever in any position other than P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
■ If “Power Turned Off to Save Battery” is shown
Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.
Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that
level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.
■ When a message that indicates the need for the shift lever operation is shown
To prevent the shift lever from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift lever may be shown on the multiinformation display. In that case, follow the instruction of the message and shift the shift
lever.
■ When “Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multiinformation display
The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
● The LED headlight system
● The automatic headlight leveling system
● Automatic High Beam
■ If “Forward Camera System Unavailable” or “Forward Camera System Unavailable
Clean Windshield” is displayed (if equipped)
The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is
resolved.
● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
● Automatic High Beam
■ If “Engine Oil Level Low” is shown
Indicates that engine oil level is low.
Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.
This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope.
Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disappears.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

531

■ If a following message is shown, take appropriate action and confirm that the message

has disappeared. (→P. 307)

● “Crawl Not Available Select L4 and Shift to [D] or [R] Position”
● “Crawl Not Available Check System Operation Conditions”
● “Turn Assist Function Not Available Check System Operation Conditions”
● “Turn Assist Function Not Available Activate Crawl Control”
■ If “Maintenance Required Soon” is shown (U.S.A. only)

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance
schedule* should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ If “Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is shown (U.S.A. only)

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset.
(The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.)
Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is
performed (→P. 465)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is shown

NOTICE
■ While the engine oil level warning is displayed

Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. (The indicator will not work
properly unless the message has been reset.)
Check the engine oil, and change if necessary. After changing the engine oil, the message should be reset. (→P. 475)
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is shown
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. (The indicator will not work properly
unless the message has been reset.)
Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the
engine oil, the message should be reset. (→P. 475)
■ If “Visit Your Dealer” is shown
The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.

532

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with
the spare tire.
For details about tires: →P. 486
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond
repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to “P”.
● Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC. (→P. 295)
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Jack

Spare tire

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Tool box

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

533

WARNING
■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on
this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Be sure to turn off the 4-Wheel AHC and stop the engine.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle will be injured.
■ Using the jack handle
Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver, to prevent
the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

534

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack
1

Remove the cover.

Unhook the rubber band and take
out the jack.
1

Loosen

Tighten

Loosen and remove the jack.

Taking out the tool box
1

Remove the cover.

Take out the tool box.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

535

Taking out the spare tire
1

Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle and the jack extension bar from the tool box and assemble by
following these steps.
1

Loosen the screw using a screwdriver.

Assemble the jack handle and the
jack handle extension bar and
tighten the screw.
Check that the screw is firmly tightened.

Open the cover.
7

Insert the jack handle extension into
the lowering screw.
1

Lower

Raise
Place a rag under the jack handle
extension to protect the back door.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

536

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Lower the spare tire completely to
the ground.

Pull out the spare tire and remove
the holding bracket and spare wheel
cover.

Replacing a flat tire
1

Chock the tires.

Flat tire
Front
Rear

Wheel chock positions

Left-hand side

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
2

21-inch tires: Pry off the wheel ornament, using the beveled end of the
wheel ornament remover as shown.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).

Assembling the jack handle.

537

Remove the jack handle, jack extension bar and jack handle bar from the tool box and
assemble by following these steps.
1

Loosen the bolts and the screw
using either the jack handle or a
screwdriver.
7

Assemble the jack handle extension bar and the jack handle bar
and tighten the bolts.
Check that the bolts are firmly tightened.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

538

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3

Assemble the jack handle extension bar and the jack handle and
tighten the screw.
Check that the screw is firmly tightened.

Position the jack at the jack points as
shown.
1

Front
Under the chassis frame side rail

Rear
Under the rear axle housing

Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7

539

Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the ground,
place the tire so that the wheel design
faces up to avoid scratching the wheel
surface.

WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from under the
vehicle.
• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the
ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the
vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes
will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts
while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
• Turn off the vehicle height control.
The vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function and you may
catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident. (→P. 295)
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire
to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to
bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts
to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for
that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes
of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while
the vehicle is moving.
■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door
In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door main
switch (→P. 124). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if
the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers
being caught and injured.

540

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire
1

Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact
surface, the wheel nuts may loosen
while the vehicle is in motion, and the
tire may come off the vehicle.

Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to approximately the same amount.
Turn the nut washers until they come
into contact with the disc wheel.

Washer
Disc wheel

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each nut two or three
times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
5

Reinstall the wheel ornament.



20-inch tires

Remove the center wheel ornament
from the flat tire by pushing from the
reverse side, and reinstall it.



541

21-inch tires

Make sure to push the center part of
the wheel ornament.

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

542

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

■ Stowing the flat tire

Failure to follow steps listed under stowing the tire may result in damage to the spare
tire carrier and loss of the tire, which could result in death or serious injury.

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools
1

Lay down the tire with the valve stem
facing up and install the spare wheel
cover.

Install the holding bracket, inserting
the claw into the wheel lug nut hole.
Turn the jack handle extension
clockwise to take up slack in the
chain.
Then, check to ensure the claw is in the
wheel lug nut hole and the holding
bracket is centered in the wheel hub.
1

Holding bracket

Claw

incorrect

correct

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3

543

Raise the tire.
While raising, secure the tire, taking
care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any surrounding part, to
prevent it from flying forward during a
collision or sudden braking.
After the tire goes half way up, check
that the suspended chain is able to enter
the tire hole, for proper storage.

Tightening torque:
33.2 ft•lbf (45 N•m, 4.6 kgf•m)
4

Confirm that the tire is not loose
after tightening:
1

Push and pull the tire

Try rotating
Visually check to ensure the tire is
not hung on surrounding parts.

If looseness or misassembly exists, repeat step

and step

Repeat step 4 , any time the tire is lowered or disturbed.

Stow the tools and jack securely.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 487)

NOTICE
Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle underbody.
■ When replacing the tires
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or
other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 487)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

■ When stowing the flat tire

544

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being
followed (→P. 205), consider each of the following points:

The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(→P. 205)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P. 75)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights
are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 549)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

The starter motor does not turn over.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem
such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available
to start the engine. (→P. 545)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

545

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights
do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 549)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures
are unknown.

Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim
measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally.
1

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in P.

Set the engine switch to the ACCESSORY mode.

Push and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the
brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

546

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(→P. 134) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and
the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
Use the mechanical key (→P. 111) in
order to perform the following operations (driver’s door only):
1

Locks all the doors

Closes the windows and moon roof*
(turn and hold)

Unlocks the doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks the
driver’s door. Turning the key once again
unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and moon roof* (turn and hold)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

547

Starting the engine
1

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Lexus emblem side of the
electronic key to the engine switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a
buzzer sounds and the engine switch
will turn to IGNITION ON mode.
When the smart access system with
push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will
turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that

is shown on the

multi-information display.
4

Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Stopping the engine

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping
the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic
key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P. 503)
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in 3 step above. The engine does
not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P. 206)
■ Alarm
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.
If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm
may be triggered. (→P. 77)
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: →P. 580)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P. 134)

548

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof

Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or
moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

549

If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt
battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below.
1

Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the
situation, the alarm may activate and
doors locked. (→P. 79)

Open the hood. Remove the engine compartment cover. (→P. 474)

Connect the jumper cables.

When trouble arises

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

550

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and
maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of
your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors with the engine switch off.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine switch to
IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle’s engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact
reverse order in which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer, as soon
as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low

speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

■ Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not
in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If
the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be
unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
The power back door must be initialized. (→P. 126)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

551

WARNING
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas
that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling
the battery.
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow
any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately
wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of
the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

552

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 88) enters the
red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle
speed does not increase.)
● Steam is coming from under the hood.

Correction procedures
1

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and
then stop the engine.

If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator
core (radiator) for any leaks.
1

Radiator

Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4

553

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
1

Reservoir

“F” line

“L” line

Radiator cap

Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if
coolant is unavailable.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a
cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow.
If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
7

If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the air
conditioning condenser cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks
from the radiator or hoses.

554

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam
has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and
belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap or the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant

Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant
to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

555

If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:
1

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and release the parking brake. Then,
while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press

to turn off Active TRAC.

■ Extra high mode

→P. 299

When trouble arises

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

556

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding
area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also
lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than nec-

essary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle

may require towing to be freed.

● When a warning message for the automatic transmission fluid temperature is dis-

played while attempting to free a stuck vehicle, immediately remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal and wait until the warning message disappears. Otherwise, the
transmission may become damaged. (→P. 528)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

557

Vehicle specifications

8
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ................. 558
Fuel information..........................566
Tire information ..........................569
8-2. Customization
Customizable features ........... 580
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.........................593

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

558

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length

200.0 in. (5080 mm)

Overall width

78.0 in. (1980 mm)

Overall height*1

73.4 in. (1865 mm)
75.2 in. (1910 mm)*2

Wheelbase

112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Front

64.8 in. (1645 mm)*3
65.0 in. (1650 mm)*4

Rear

64.6 in. (1640 mm)*3
65.0 in. (1650 mm)*4

Tread

Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
TWR
(trailer weight +
cargo weight)

*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: Vehicles with roof antenna
*3: Vehicles with 20-inch tires
*4: Vehicles with 21-inch tires

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

1285 lb. (580 kg)
With brake

7000 lb. (3175 kg)

Without
brake

1000 lb. (454 kg)

8-1. Specifications

559

Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top
left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
8

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

560

8-1. Specifications

Engine
Model

5.7L V8 (3UR-FE)

Type

8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.70 × 4.02 in. (94.0 × 102.0 mm)

Displacement

345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm3)

Valve clearance
Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Fuel
Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating

91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 Imp.gal.)

Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill — reference*)
With filter
Without filter

7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine
oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level
on the dipstick.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

561

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However, it
must be replaced with SAE 0W-20
at the next oil change.

Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you
should use.

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

562

8-1. Specifications

Cooling system
Capacity (Reference)

17.1 qt. (16.2 L, 14.3 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and nonborate coolant with long-life hybrid organic
acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap

DENSO SK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at 68°F
(20°C):

Charging rates

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine
and all lights are turned off.)
5 A max.

8-1. Specifications

563

Differential
Oil capacity
Front
Rear
Oil type and viscosity

2.01 qt. (1.90 L, 1.67 Imp.qt.)
4.44 qt. (4.20 L, 3.70 Imp.qt.)
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent

Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus
dealer for further details.

Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity

10.7 qt. (10.1 L, 8.9 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration
in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
8

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

564

8-1. Specifications

Transfer
Oil capacity

1.53 qt. (1.45 L, 1.28 Imp.qt.)

Oil type*

Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or equivalent

Recommended oil viscosity

SAE 75W

*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or an equivalent of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer
for further details.

Brakes
Pedal clearance*

4.5 in. (114 mm) Min.

Pedal free play

0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1.0 ⎯ 6.0 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)
while the engine is running

Chassis lubrication

Propeller shafts

Spider

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Slide yoke

Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chassis
grease, NLGI No.2 or Lithium base chassis
grease, NLGI No.2

Steering
Free play

Less than 1.18 in. (30 mm)

Power steering fluid type

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

565

Suspension
Fluid type

Suspension fluid AHC

Tires and wheels


20-inch tires

Tire size

285/50R20 112V

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Normal driving
Front:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Trailer towing
Add 2 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear
tires.

Wheel size

20 × 8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)



21-inch tires
275/50R21 113V XL

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Normal driving
Front:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Trailer towing
Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
rear tires.

Wheel size

21 X 8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Tire size

566

8-1. Specifications

Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research
Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance
and fuel economy. If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine
may occur and may void the vehicle warranty.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. .
■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are
using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not
correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected
to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In
the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the
build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official
website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated
gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Lexus recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

567

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% etha-

nol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that
could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50, E85
(which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 91.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains on octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
8

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

568

8-1. Specifications
NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

569

Tire information
Typical tire symbols

Tire size

(→P. 571)

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(→P. 570)

Location of treadwear indicators

(→P. 486)

Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the
plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply
tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 575)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 575)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
9

Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Summer tires or all season tires

(→P. 490)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer
tire.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire
has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

570

8-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)


Type A

DOT symbol*

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

Manufacturer’s code



Type B

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

571

Tire size
■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1

Tire use (P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index
(2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions
1

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

572

8-1. Specifications

Tire section names
1

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

573

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with
information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on
the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use.
Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

574

8-1. Specifications

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and
not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

575

Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Cold tire inflation pressure

Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1
mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pres- The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may
sure
be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended
pressure

inflation Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items
which may be replaced) of automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment,
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,
and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional
weight optional engine

The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle (b) Accessory weight
weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified
in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the
third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Normal occupant weight

576

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

Meaning

Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg)
(Total load capacity)
times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
load on an individual tire that is determined by disVehicle maximum load on The
tributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded
the tire
vehicle weight, and dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is determined by disVehicle normal load on the tributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory
weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in
tire
accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated
tire

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped
or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the
rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in the
bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less
than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

577

Meaning

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on
the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the
rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher
inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire
that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
Intended outboard sidewall
or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible infla- The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may
tion pressure
be inflated
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Measuring rim

578

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

Meaning

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric
and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher
inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method
for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on
Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked
with an Alpine Symbol (
) on at least one sidewall

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

579

Meaning

Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed
Treadwear indicators (TWI) to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the
tread
Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing

*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capac- Vehicle normal load, Num- Occupant distribution in a
ity, Number of occupants
ber of occupants
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1
in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second seat,
2 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat
8

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

580

8-2. Customization

Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized
to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by
using the multi-information display, by using the Remote Touch screen or at
your Lexus dealer.

Customizing vehicle features
■ Changing by using the Remote Touch screen
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen and select “Vehicle”.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be
changed for details.
■ Changing by using the multi-information display
1

Press

or
or

of the meter control switches, select

of the meter control switches, select the item or the

desired setting, and then press
To go back to the previous screen, press

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

.
.

581

8-2. Customization

Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being
customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
1

Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch screen

Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display

Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, – =Not available

■ Smart access system with push-button start (→P. 132)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Smart access system with
push-button start

Off

—

Driver’s door

All the doors

—

Default setting

Customized
setting

Off

—

All doors unlocked O
in one step

—

Smart door unlocking

■ Wireless remote control (→P. 110)

Function
Wireless remote control

Unlocking operation

Power back door operation

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Push and hold

One short push

—

Push twice

—

Off

—

Off

—

Vehicle specifications

Alarm (panic mode)

Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps

582

8-2. Customization

■ Smart access system with push-button start (→P. 132) and wireless remote

control (→P. 110)
Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Operation signal (Emergency flashers)

Off

—

Off

Adjust the volume of confirmation buzzer sounds
when the vehicle is locked
or unlocked

Open door warning function (when locking the vehicle)

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened
after
being
unlocked

1 to 7

Off
Off

60 seconds

30 seconds
120 seconds

■ Door lock (→P. 115)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Unlocking using a mechanical key

Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps

All doors unlocked
in one step

—

Automatic door lock

Shifting the shift
lever to position
other than P

—

Automatic door unlock

Shifting the shift
lever to P

—

Off

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle speed is
approximately
12 mph (20 km/h)
or higher
Off
Driver’s door is
opened

583

8-2. Customization
■ Power back door (→P. 122)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Power back door switch
operation

Push and hold

One short push

—

Operation signal

Off

—

Back door opener switch
automatic open function

Off

—

Wireless remote control
linked operation (one
motion)

On*1

—

On (Push twice)*2
Off *1, 3

*1: In this case, the power back door operation using the wireless remote control can also
be made only by pushing and holding.

*2: In this case, the power back door operation using the wireless remote control can also
be made only by pushing twice.

: The back door can be opened using the wireless remote control after unlocking the
back door.

■ Power windows (→P. 165)

Customized
setting

Off

—

Off

—

Wireless remote control
linked operation (open)*

Off

—

Power windows open warning buzzer

Off

—

Buzzer sounds if operated
using wireless remote control

Off

—

Mechanical key
operation (close)*

linked

Mechanical key
operation (open)*

linked

*: The settings of the moon roof are changed in conjunction with the settings of the
power windows.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Default setting

Function

584

8-2. Customization

■ Moon roof (→P. 168)

Default setting

Customized
setting

Off

—

Linked operation of components when mechanical
key is used

Slide only

Tilt only

—

Wireless remote control
linked operation (open)*

Off

—

Linked operation of components when wireless
remote control is used

Slide only

Tilt only

—

Moon roof open warning
buzzer

Off

—

Function
Mechanical
operation*

key

linked

*: The settings of the power windows are changed in conjunction with the settings of the
moon roof.
■ Automatic light control system (→P. 221)

Function
Light sensor sensitivity
Daytime running light system

Default setting

Customized
setting

Standard

-2 to 2

—

Off*

—

Off
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off
after doors are closed

30 seconds

60 seconds
90 seconds

Welcome lighting illumination control

*: Vehicles sold outside Canada

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Off

585

8-2. Customization
■ Illumination (→P. 417)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Interior lights illumination
control

Off

—

Off
Time period before the interior lights turn off

15 seconds

7.5 seconds
30 seconds

Off

—

Operation when the doors
are unlocked

Off

—

Operation when you
approach the vehicle with
the electronic key on your
person (when the interior
light switch is door position)

Off

—

Shift lever light

Off

—

Footwell lights

Off

—

Door trim lights and footwell lights illumination control

Off

—

Door trim lights

Off

—

Operation of the outer foot
lights when you approach
the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

Off

—

Operation of the outer foot
lights when the doors are
unlocked with the power
door lock switch

Off

—

Operation of
board lights
approach the
the electronic
person

Off

—

Off

—

the running
when you
vehicle with
key on your

Operation of the running
board lights the doors are
unlocked with the power
door lock switch

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Operation after the engine
switch is turned off

586

8-2. Customization
Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Operation of the running
board lights when a door is
opened

Off

—

Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for dimming the meter lights etc.

Standard

-2 to 2

—

Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for brightening the meter lights etc.

Standard

-2 to 2

—

■ Intuitive parking assist (→P. 287)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Detection distance of the
front center sensor

Far

Near

—

Detection distance of the
rear center sensor

Far

Near

—

Alert Volume (alert volume
can be adjusted)

1 to 5

—

Display setting (when intuitive parking assist is operating)

All sensors displayed

Display off

—

■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P. 399)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity

Standard

-3 to 3

—

A/C Auto switch operation

Auto

Manual

—

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

587

8-2. Customization
■ Rear window wiper and washer (→P. 235)

Default setting

Customized
setting

Drip prevention function

Off

—

Rear window wiper operation linked with washer

Off

—

Linked operation when the
shift lever in R position

Off

—

Times of the linked operation when the shift lever in R
position

Once

Continuously

—

Customized
setting

—

All doors

—

Function

■ Driving position memory (→P. 151)

Function

Default setting

Driver’s seat movement
when exiting the vehicle

Standard

Selection the door linking
driving position memory
with door unlock operation

Driver’s door

Off
Partial

■ Outside rear view mirrors (→P. 162)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Automatic folding/extending operation

Linked to locking/
unlocking of the
doors

Off
Linked to engine
switch operation

—

Off

—

Vehicle specifications

Linked mirror
when reversing

function

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

588

8-2. Customization

■ Seat heaters and ventilators* (→P. 413)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Adjustment of the front seat
heater temperature or the
ventilator fan speed during
automatic operation (individual seat adjustment
available)

Level 3 (standard)

Level 1 (low) to
level 5 (high)

—

Adjustment of the rear seat
heater temperature or the
ventilator fan speed during
automatic operation (individual seat adjustment
available)

Level 3 (standard)

Level 1 (low) to
level 5 (high)

—

*: If equipped
■ Heated steering wheel* (→P. 413)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Automatic steering wheel
heating

Off

—

Time until automatic steering wheel heating turns off

Level 3 (standard)

Level 1 (short) to
level 5 (long)

—

*: If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

589

8-2. Customization
■ Drive mode customization (→P. 284)

Function

Default setting

Customized
setting
Eco

—

Powertrain

Normal

Chassis

Normal

Automatic air conditioning
system

Normal

Eco

—

Default setting

Customized
setting

—

Power
Sport
Comfort

■ Turn signal lever (→P. 217)

Function
The number of times the
turn signal lights flash automatically when the turn signal lever is moved to the
first position during a lane
change

4
5
3

6
7
Off

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

590

8-2. Customization

■ Multi-information display (→P. 91)

Function
Language

Default
setting
English

Customized
setting
French
Spanish

–

miles
(MPG Imperial)
Units*1

miles (MPG US)

km (L/100 km)
km (km/L)

Eco Driving Indicator Light

Off

–

Drive
information 1

Desired status
screen*2

–

Drive information screen dis- Distance (range)
played on the second screen
Average speed
of
(after reset)
(Drive information 2)

–

Pop-up display

Off

–

Color 1

Color 2

–

switch settings
Drive information screen displayed on the first screen of
(Drive information 1)

Accent color

Current fuel
consumption
Average fuel
economy
(after reset)

*1: The default setting varies according to countries.
*2: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on the multi-information display)
*3: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset),
average fuel economy (after refuel), average fuel economy (after start), average vehicle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), distance (driving range),
distance (after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

591

8-2. Customization
■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)* (→P. 261)

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Alert method

(Steering
vibration)

(Buzzer)

Alert sensitivity

Standard
On

Function

Vehicle sway warning
Vehicle sway warning sensitivity

Standard

—

High

—

Off

—

Low
High

*: If equipped
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (→P. 363)

Default setting

Customized setting

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

Off

—

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function)

Off

—

Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness

Bright

Dim

—

Function

Early
Alert timing for presence of
approaching vehicle (BSM
function only)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Late
Only when in
blind spot

Level 2

Level 1
Level 3

8
O

—

Vehicle specifications

RCTA buzzer volume

Intermediate

592

8-2. Customization

■ HUD (Head-up Display)* (→P. 100)

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Driving support display
(Navigation system*)

Off

—

Driving support display
(Driving assist*)

Off

—

Driving support display
(compass*)

Off

—

Driving support display
(audio*)

Off

—

Function

*: If equipped
■ Vehicle customization
● When smart access system with push-button start is turned off, unlock door cannot be

selected.

● When doors are not opened after unlocking and are then automatically re-locked, a

signal will be given if Operation signal (Emergency flashers) or Operation signal
(Buzzer) are set to on.
■ When setting using the multi-information display
When using the vehicle switches to set an item that can also be set using the touch
screen, the item displayed on the Remote Touch will not change immediately.
If the engine switch is first turned to off, the screen display will change once the engine
switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode again.
■ When customizing using the Remote Touch
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Also,
to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing the features.
WARNING
■ During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust
gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This
may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-3. Initialization

593

Items to initialize
The following item must be initialized for normal system operation such cases
as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the
vehicle:
Item

When to initialize

Reference

Message indicating mainte- After the maintenance is pernance is required (U.S.A. only) formed

P. 465

Power back door

• After reconnecting or changing
the battery with power back door
opened
• After changing a fuse with power
back door opened

P. 122

Tire pressure warning system

• When the set tire pressure has
been changed before towing.
• When rotating the tires in above
situation.

P. 486

Multi-terrain Monitor

After reconnecting or changing the
battery

P. 361

Engine oil maintenance data*

After the maintenance is performed

P. 475

*: If equipped

Vehicle specifications

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

594

8-3. Initialization

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

595

For owners

9
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.....................................596
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..............................................597
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..............................................599

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

596

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus
Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

597

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
(in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from
the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité
● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière

jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit cependant
pas toucher le cou ni glisser de
l’épaule.
● Placez la ceinture abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier. Tenezvous assis bien au fond du siège, le
dos droit.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

For owners

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

598
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité

Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de l’eau
tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu’elles ne
présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures.
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture du siège central de la troisième rangée de sièges

N’utilisez pas la ceinture du siège central de la
troisième rangée de sièges si l’une des boucles
est détachée. Attacher une seule boucle pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, en cas de freinage ou de dérapage
brusques, ou d’accident.

■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité

Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas de
coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité endommagée ne peut pas protéger les occupants contre des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

599

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
(in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in
English.

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS avant
1

Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux
Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For owners

Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/coussin gonflable SRS du passager
avant
Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager
avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs

600
◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau
3

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux de la
deuxième rangée de sièges

Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau
● Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des

sièges latéraux

● Peuvent aider à empêcher les occupants d’tre éjectés du véhicule en

cas de tonneaux

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

601
Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

10
11

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

12
13
14

15
16
17
18

Module de capteur de coussin
gonflable
Capteurs d’impact avant
Limiteurs de force et dispositifs de
tension des ceintures de sécurité
(sièges avant)
Capteur de position du siège du
conducteur
Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR
BAG OFF”
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture
de sécurité du passager avant
Système de classification de
l’occupant du siège du passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)
Dispositifs de tension des ceintures
de sécurité (sièges latéraux de la
deuxième rangée de sièges)

For owners

Coussins gonflables de protection
des genoux
Coussins gonflables en rideau
Coussin gonflable du passager
avant
Capteurs d’impact latéral (portière
avant)
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant
Lampe témoin SRS
Capteurs d’impact latéral (arrière)
Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière
(sièges latéraux de la deuxième
rangée de sièges)
Coussin gonflable du conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture
de sécurité du conducteur
Capteur de sûreté (arrière)

602
Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont la
conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable (ECU) contrôle
le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des informations obtenues
des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le diagramme des composants
du système ci-dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la
gravité de l’accident et aux occupants. Au moment du déploiement des coussins
gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs de coussin gonflable et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique
pour aider à limiter le mouvement des occupants.
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables SRS.
Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité de la manière appropriée.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être utilisés avec les ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable et
peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le
conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, fait les recommandations suivantes :
La zone à risque du coussin gonflable du conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm)
de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une marge de sécurité
suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable. Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si maintenant vous vous tenez
assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite
de plusieurs manières :
• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre encore
aisément les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même si leur siège se trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement
en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est
moindre après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et
non glissant pour être assis plus haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule.
• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet
d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers votre tête et vers
votre cou.
Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA, tout
en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, ainsi que la vue sur les commandes
du tableau de bord.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

603
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été

reliée aux boucles des ceintures de sécurité
des sièges avant sans avoir aussi été attachée
à la plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager
avant portent tout de même leur ceinture de
sécurité même si les ceintures de sécurité ne
sont pas attachées. Les coussins gonflables
SRS avant peuvent alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors d’une collision, ce qui pourrait
occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de collision. Assurez-vous de
toujours porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la
rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force

considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment
lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit
être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.
● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un
enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à
l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de placer
et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges arrière du
véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.
● N’installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le
siège du passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.
En cas d’accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du passager avant pourraient infliger à l’enfant des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le
dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route était installé sur le siège du
passager avant.

For owners

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

604
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et

ne vous appuyez pas sur la planche de bord.

● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au cous-

sin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant
tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.

● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur le

brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants
avant, latéraux ou arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la

portière sur les sièges des passagers ni sortir
la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.

● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones

telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de
volant ou encore la partie inférieure du tableau de bord.
Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS du
conducteur, du passager avant et de protection des genoux se déploient.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

605
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne fixez rien sur des zones telles que les

portières, le pare-brise, les glaces de
portières, les montants avant, latéraux ou
arrière, le brancard de pavillon et la poignée
de maintien.

● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’autres objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vête-

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For owners

ments. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner
des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS en rideau.
● Si le recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.
● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gonflables
SRS latéraux se déploient, car ces accessoires pourraient entraver le déploiement
des coussins gonflables. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux,
occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des
composants des coussins gonflables SRS.
Cela peut provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après
leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.
● Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez le véhicule
si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous les résidus
afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.
● Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, tels que le tampon de
volant et les garnitures des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, sont endommagés ou
fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
● Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager avant. Cela
disperserait le poids du passager, ce qui empêcherait le capteur de le détecter correctement. Cela pourrait empêcher le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS du
passager avant en cas de collision.

606
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables

SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables SRS
pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord,
de la planche de bord, des sièges, du capitonnage des sièges, des montants avant,
latéraux et arrière ou des brancards de pavillon
● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile avant, du pare-chocs avant ou du côté de
l’habitacle
● Installation d’une protection de calandre (barre safari, barre kangourou, etc.), de
lames de déneigement, de treuils ou d’un porte-bagages de toit
● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un lecteur de CD
● Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques réduites

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

607

Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).............................. 608
Alphabetical index...................................612

For vehicles with a navigation system or a multimedia system, refer
to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Audio/video system
• Rear seat entertainment system
• Hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

608

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus
dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made

by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 112)

● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.

Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (→P. 114)
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 503)
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (→P. 206)

● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your
person.

● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave.

(→P. 134)

The rear door cannot be opened
● Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock.
(→P. 118)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

609

If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
● Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?

(→P. 205)

● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 205)
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 133)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 208)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 547)

● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 549)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake
pedal
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode (→P. 215)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

610

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped
● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P. 207)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window
switches
● Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated
if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 165)
The engine switch is turned off automatically

● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of
time. (→P. 207)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving

● The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?
(→P. 522)
● The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 218)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(→P. 520, 528)
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 77)

To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode or start the
engine.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

611

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof opened?

Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P. 528)
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to

P. 520, 528.

When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

(→P. 532)

The vehicle becomes stuck
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

(→P. 555)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

612

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index
A
A/C..................................................399, 410
Air conditioning filter.........................501
Changing the rear seat
settings................................................ 404
Front automatic air
conditioning system ..................... 399
Micro dust and pollen filter.......... 405
Rear air conditioning system......... 410
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)........377
Function .................................................. 377
Warning light ...................................... 520
Active head restraint............................ 140
Active Height Control
Suspension........................................... 295
Active TRAC...........................................377
Air cleaner.................................................471
Air conditioning filter........................... 501
Air conditioning system...........399, 410
Air conditioning filter.........................501
Changing the rear seat
settings................................................ 404
Front automatic air
conditioning system ..................... 399
Micro dust and pollen filter.......... 405
Rear air conditioning system......... 410

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Airbags........................................................ 38
Airbag operating conditions .......... 46
Airbag precautions for your
child............................................................ 41
Airbag warning light ........................520
Correct driving posture.................... 28
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions ....................... 46
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................................... 44
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................50
General airbag precautions ............. 41
Locations of airbags............................38
Modification and disposal
of airbags............................................... 45
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................................. 46
Side airbag precautions .................... 44
Side and curtain shield
airbags operating conditions...... 46
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions ......................... 44
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners ..........................599
SRS airbags .............................................38
Alarm ............................................................ 77
Alarm ...........................................................77
Warning buzzer.................................520
Anchor brackets.......................................62
Antenna
Smart access system with
push-button start..............................132

Alphabetical index

Anti-lock brake system
(ABS).......................................................377
Function .................................................. 377
Warning light ...................................... 520
Approach warning
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range....................276
Armrest .................................................... 442
Assist grips .............................................. 444
Audio input*
Audio system*
Automatic air conditioning
system ..........................................399, 410
Air conditioning filter.........................501
Front automatic air
conditioning system ..................... 399
Rear air conditioning system......... 410
Automatic door locking and
unlocking systems................................ 119
Automatic headlight leveling
system .................................................... 223
Automatic High Beam ....................... 224
Automatic light control system....... 222
Automatic transmission...................... 210
2nd start mode....................................... 211
Downshift restriction warning
buzzer ................................................... 215
Driving mode select switch ..........284
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .................................... 215
S mode ......................................................213
AUX port*
Auxiliary boxes...................................... 425

613

B
Back door.................................................. 122
Back door handle................................124
Jam protection function....................126
Power back door ................................124
Wireless remote control................... 110
Battery ...................................................... 482
Battery checking................................482
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.........................................549
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................382
Warning light.......................................520
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ............... 363
Bluetooth®*
Bluetooth® audio*
Bluetooth® phone*
Bottle holders .........................................424
Brake
Fluid ..........................................................564
Parking brake ........................................218
Warning light.......................................520
Brake assist..............................................377
Break-in tips ............................................. 175
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control ........89
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ............... 363
Blind Spot Monitor function......... 367
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function................................................ 373

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

614

Alphabetical index

C
Care.................................................458, 461
Aluminum wheels ............................. 458
Exterior................................................... 458
Interior ...................................................... 461
Radar sensor....................................... 366
Seat belts................................................462
Cargo capacity....................................... 186
Cargo hooks ...........................................427
Cargo net hooks....................................427
CD player*
Chains .......................................................383
Child restraint system............................ 57
Booster seat definition....................... 58
Booster seat installation.....................69
Convertible seat definition.............. 58
Convertible seat installation ............ 67
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................ 50
Infant seat/convertible seat
definition................................................ 58
Infant seat/convertible seat
installation..............................................65
Installing CRS with
LATCH system ..................................63
Installing CRS with seat belt............65
Installing CRS with top tether
strap..........................................................70
LATCH system......................................63

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Child safety.................................................56
Airbag precautions................................ 41
Back door precautions..................... 127
Battery precautions...............483, 551
Child-protectors................................... 118
Child restraint system......................... 57
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 34
Installing child restraints .................... 62
Moon roof precautions ......................171
Power window lock switch.............165
Power window precautions...........167
Rear door child-protectors............. 118
Removed key battery
precautions .......................................504
Safety information.................................56
Seat belt extender precautions ......37
Seat belt precautions.......................... 36
Seat heater precautions ...................413
Child-protectors ..................................... 118
Cleaning ........................................ 458, 461
Aluminum wheels..............................458
Exterior ...................................................458
Interior.......................................................461
Radar sensor........................................366
Seat belts................................................ 462
Climate concierge switch................. 398
Clock..........................................................432
Coat hooks ..............................................443
Compass ...................................................... 91
Condenser...............................................479
Cool box.................................................. 430

Alphabetical index

Coolant..................................................... 562
Capacity .................................................562
Checking................................................478
Preparing and checking
before winter ................................... 382
Cooling system
Engine overheating.......................... 552
Crawl Control ....................................... 307
Cruise control
Cruise control....................................... 281
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range....................269
Cup holders............................................ 423
Curtain shield airbags ...........................38
Customizable features.......................580

D
Daytime running light system.......... 222
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors............ 405
Rear window ....................................... 405
Windshield ........................................... 405
Differential...............................................563
Dimension ...............................................558
Dinghy towing........................................204

615

Display
Crawl Control.....................................307
Drive information.................................. 94
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ...................269
Fuel consumption information..... 106
Head-up display ................................. 100
Intuitive parking assist......................288
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)....... 264
Multi-information display....................91
Multi-terrain Monitor.........................316
Multi-terrain Select .............................312
Warning messages ..........................528
Do-it-yourself maintenance..............470
Door courtesy lights
Location ................................................... 417
Doors
Automatic door locking and
unlocking system............................... 119
Back door................................................ 122
Door glasses..........................................165
Door lock.................................................. 115
Open door warning buzzer ........ 522
Open door warning light .............. 522
Outside rear view mirrors ..............162
Rear door child-protectors............. 118
Side doors................................................ 115

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

616

Alphabetical index

Drive information .................................... 94
Driver’s seat belt reminder light..... 522
Driver’s seat position memory...........151
Driving.........................................................174
Break-in tips .......................................... 175
Correct posture.....................................28
Driving in the rain................................ 175
Driving mode select switch ..........284
Off-road precautions...................... 386
Procedures .............................................174
Winter drive tips................................ 382
Driving position memory......................151
Driving position memory ..................151
Memory recall function.................... 152
Power easy access system ..............151
DVD player*
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
Function ..................................................269

E
Eco Driving Indicator Light................. 87
EDR (Event data recorder)...................10
Electronic key ...........................................110
Battery-saving function.................... 134
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................ 546
Replacing the battery...................... 503

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds ..........520
If a warning light turns on ..............520
If a warning message is
displayed ............................................528
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................546
If the engine will not start ...............544
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.........................................549
If you have a flat tire..........................532
If you lose your keys.................... 112, 114
If you think something is
wrong.................................................... 518
If your vehicle becomes stuck.....555
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency................................ 511
If your vehicle needs to be
towed .....................................................512
If your vehicle overheats................552
Emergency flashers ..............................510

Alphabetical index

Engine
Accessory mode............................... 206
Air cleaner...............................................471
Compartment......................................473
Engine switch...................................... 205
Exhaust gas precautions ................... 74
Hood ........................................................ 472
How to start the engine ................. 205
Identification number ...................... 559
If the engine will not start................544
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.............511
Ignition switch (engine
switch)................................................. 205
Overheating ........................................ 552
Engine compartment cover............. 474
Engine coolant....................................... 478
Capacity .................................................562
Checking................................................478
Preparing and checking
before winter ................................... 382
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ........................................................88
Engine immobilizer system ................. 75
Engine oil ................................................. 475
Capacity ................................................560
Checking................................................475
Preparing and checking
before winter ................................... 382

617

Engine switch (ignition switch) ....... 205
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light)......................... 417
Event data recorder (EDR)...................10
Exhaust gas precautions .......................74

F
First-aid kit holder................................ 428
Flat tire...................................................... 532
Floor mats....................................................26
Fluid
Automatic transmission..................563
Brake........................................................564
Steering ..................................................564
Washer...................................................485
Fog lights...................................................229
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508
Switch ...................................................... 229
Footwell lights.......................................... 417
Four-wheel AHC (Active Height
Control Suspension) ....................... 295
Easy access mode ............................ 297
Disabling the height control.........298
Selecting vehicle height..................295
Four-wheel drive system
Center differential
lock/unlock .......................................304
Four-wheel drive control
switch ...................................................303
Warning light....................................... 522
Front automatic air conditioning
system.................................................... 399
Front doors ................................................ 115

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

618

Alphabetical index

Front passenger occupant
classification system............................50
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light ..................................... 522
Front seats ................................................ 140
Adjustment............................................. 140
Cleaning.................................................. 461
Correct driving posture ....................28
Driving position memory ..................151
Head restraints.....................................155
Power easy access system ..............151
Seat heaters ........................................... 415
Seat ventilators..................................... 415
Front side marker lights .......................221
Light switch .............................................221
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Front turn signal lights ..........................217
Turn signal lever ...................................217
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Fuel ............................................................. 566
Capacity ................................................560
Fuel gauge............................................... 88
Fuel pump shut off system.............. 519
Gas station information................. 628
Information ........................................... 566
Refueling.................................................239
Type .........................................................560
Warning light .......................................522

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Fuel consumption information..........105
Fuel filler door........................................ 239
Opener...................................................240
Refueling ................................................ 239
Fuel pump shut off system ..................519
Fuses..........................................................505

G
Gas station information..................... 628
Garage door opener.......................... 445
Gauges........................................................ 88
Glove box ................................................. 421

H
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)*
Head restraints........................................155
Headlight cleaner ................................ 238
Headlights................................................. 221
Automatic headlight leveling....... 223
Automatic High Beam system ... 224
Light switch............................................. 221
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508
Head-up display .................................... 100
Heated steering wheel ........................ 414
Heaters
Front automatic air conditioning
system..................................................399
Outside rear view mirrors ............405
Seat heaters............................................415
High mounted stoplight
Replacing.............................................. 508

Alphabetical index

Hill-start assist control.........................377
Hood...........................................................472
Hooks
Cargo hooks........................................ 427
Cargo net hooks................................ 427
Coat hooks ...........................................443
Retaining hooks (floor mat).............26
Horn............................................................ 158

I
I/M test ..................................................... 469
Identification
Engine..................................................... 559
Vehicle ................................................... 559
Ignition switch (engine switch)........205
Ignition switch light
(engine switch light)...........................417
Illuminated entry system......................419
Immobilizer system................................. 75
Indicators .................................................... 82
Initialization
Engine oil maintenance data....... 465
Items to initialize................................. 593
Power window ..................................... 166
Tire pressure warning system ....488
Inside rear view mirror........................ 160
Instrument panel light control ............89
Interior lights.............................................417
Switch........................................................ 418
Intuitive parking assist......................... 287

619

J
Jack
Vehicle-equipped jack...................532
Jack handle ............................................. 532
Jam protection function
Moon roof...............................................165
Power back door opener
and closer ............................................126
Power windows....................................169

K
Keyless entry
Smart access system with
push-button start..............................132
Wireless remote control................... 110
Keys .............................................................. 110
Battery-saving function ....................134
Electronic key......................................... 110
Engine switch ......................................205
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................546
If you lose your keys.................... 112, 114
Key number plate................................. 110
Keyless entry........................................... 110
Keys............................................................. 110
Mechanical key...................................... 110
Replacing the battery ......................503
Warning buzzer...................................133
Knee airbags ............................................. 38

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

620

Alphabetical index

L
Language (multi-information
display)...................................................590
LATCH system ........................................ 63
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ............261
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever ......................... 472
Hood lock release lever................. 472
Shift lever................................................. 210
Turn signal lever ...................................217
Wiper lever................................ 231, 235
Lexus climate concierge ...................398
Climate concierge switch............. 398
Lexus parking assist monitor*
Lexus Safety System+......................... 242
License plate lights.................................221
Light switch .............................................221
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Light
Automatic High Beam system....224
Engine switch light...............................417
Fog light switch ...................................229
Headlight switch...................................221
Illuminated entry system.................. 419
Interior lights.......................................... 418
Luggage compartment light ..........417
Personal lights ...................................... 419
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Turn signal lever ...................................217
Vanity lights ........................................... 431
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................................508
Lock steering column ......................... 207
Luggage cover ......................................428

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance .........470
General maintenance.....................466
Maintenance data............................. 558
Maintenance requirements..........464
Scheduled maintenance ................464
Malfunction indicator lamp.............. 520
Meter............................................................ 88
Indicators .................................................. 82
Instrument panel light control ........89
Meters ........................................................88
Multi-information display....................91
Warning lights.....................................520
Warning messages ..........................528
Micro dust and pollen filter.............. 405
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror..................... 160
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers...........................................405
Outside rear view mirrors ..............162
Vanity mirrors .......................................431
Moon roof .................................................168
Jam protection function....................169
Operation............................................... 168
MP3 disc*

Alphabetical index

Multi-information display.......................91
Crawl Control.....................................307
Display contents ......................................91
Drive information ..................................94
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range....................269
Fuel consumption information .....106
Intuitive parking assist..................... 288
Language..............................................590
LDA (Lane Departure Alert).......264
Multi-information display ....................91
Switching the display...........................93
Multi terrain ABS...................................377
Multi-terrain Monitor ...........................316
Multi-terrain Select................................312

Navigation system*
Noise from under vehicle ....................... 8

O
Odometer ..................................................89
Off road precautions ..........................386
Oil
Engine oil...............................................560
Front differential oil........................... 563
Rear differential oil............................ 563
Transfer oil............................................ 564
Opener
Back door................................................123
Fuel filler door......................................240
Hood ........................................................ 472

621

Outside rear view mirrors.................. 162
Adjusting and folding ........................162
Blind Spot Monitor ...........................363
Driving position memory.................. 151
Linked mirror function when
reversing...............................................163
Mirror position memory ................... 151
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers...........................................405
Outside temperature
display............................................. 95, 102
Overheating, Engine .......................... 552

P
Paddle shift switches............................. 212
Panic mode..................................................111
Parking assist sensors
(Intuitive parking assist)...................287
Parking brake ..........................................218
Operation................................................218
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer...............................523
Parking lights ........................................... 221
Light switch............................................. 221
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508
PCS (Pre-Collision system) .............249
Enabling/disabling the system....253
Function.................................................. 249
Warning light.........................................521
Personal lights ......................................... 417
Switch ........................................................419
Power back door ................................... 124
Power easy access system.................. 151
Power outlet........................................... 433

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

622

Alphabetical index

Power steering
Fluid.......................................................... 564
Power windows.......................................165
Jam protection function................... 165
Operation............................................... 165
Window lock switch.......................... 165

R
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range) ............................... 269
Radiator.................................................... 479
Radio*
Rear air conditioning system ............ 410
Rear seat ....................................................142
Adjustment..............................................142
Folding the third seats ...................... 145
Tumbling the second seats............ 143
Rear side marker lights ........................221
Light switch .............................................221
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Rear turn signal lights ...........................217
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Turn signal lever ...................................217
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror.....................160
Outside rear view mirrors.............. 162
Rear view monitor system*
Rear window defogger ......................405
Rear window wiper.............................. 235
Refueling .................................................. 239
Capacity ................................................560
Fuel types..............................................560
Opening the fuel tank cap.............239

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Remote touch/12.3-inch
display.................................................... 392
Replacing
Electronic key battery .....................503
Fuses ....................................................... 505
Light bulbs............................................ 508
Tires..........................................................532
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners ......................................... 596
Resetting the message indicating
maintenance is required ................ 465

S
Safety Connect ......................................452
Scheduled maintenance ....................464
Seat belts .................................................... 30
Adjusting the seat belt........................ 33
Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 34
Child restraint system
installation ............................................. 62
Cleaning and maintaining the
seat belt............................................... 462
Emergency locking retractor ......... 34
How to wear your seat belt............. 28
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 34
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use ................................................... 35
Reminder light and buzzer........... 522
Seat belt extender ................................ 34
Seat belt pretensioners...................... 33
SRS warning light ..............................520

Alphabetical index

Seat heaters..............................................415
Seat position memory............................151
Seat ventilators........................................415
Seating capacity..................................... 186
Seats...................................................140, 142
Adjustment...................................140, 142
Adjustment precautions ......... 141, 150
Armrest ...................................................442
Child seats/child restraint
system installation..............................62
Cleaning.................................................. 461
Driving position memory ..................151
Folding up the third seats................ 145
Front seats .............................................. 140
Head restraint.......................................155
Heaters..................................................... 415
Power easy access system ..............151
Properly sitting in the seat ................28
Rear seats ................................................142
Seat heaters ........................................... 415
Seat position memory.........................151
Seat ventilators..................................... 415
Second seats..........................................142
Third seats ...............................................142
Tumbling the second seats............ 143
Ventilators .............................................. 415

623

Sensor
Automatic headlight system .........222
Automatic High Beam
system.................................................. 224
Inside rear view mirror..................... 160
Intuitive parking assist...................... 287
LDA (Lane Departure Alert).........261
Radar sensor........................................ 244
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers................................................... 233
Service reminder indicators ............... 82
Shift lever
Automatic transmission....................210
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.....................................215
Shift lock system.........................................214
Side airbags............................................... 38
Side doors .................................................. 115
Side marker lights .................................. 221
Light switch............................................. 221
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508
Side mirrors.............................................. 162
Adjusting and folding ........................162
Blind Spot Monitor ...........................363
Heaters ...................................................405
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508
Turn signal lever................................... 217
Smart access system with
push-button start.................................132
Antenna location..................................132
Entry functions ............................. 115, 122
Starting the engine............................205

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

624

Alphabetical index

Snow tires ................................................382
“SOS” button.......................................... 452
Spare tire
Inflation pressure............................... 565
Storage location .................................532
Spark plug ............................................... 562
Specifications.........................................558
Speedometer ............................................88
SRS airbags................................................38
Steering
Column lock release........................207
Fluid.......................................................... 564
Steering wheel........................................ 158
Adjustment.............................................158
Audio switches*
Meter control switches ......................93
Power easy access system ..............151
Telephone switches*
Stop/tail lights
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Storage feature .....................................420
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck ....... 555
Sun visors...................................................431
Sunshade
Roof............................................................ 169
Rear door...............................................443

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Switch
Audio remote control switches*
Automatic High Beam switch..... 225
Center differential lock/unlock
switch ...................................................304
Climate concierge switch .............398
Cruise control switch ........... 269, 281
Door lock switch....................................117
Driving mode select switch..........284
Driving position memory
switches ................................................152
Emergency flashers switch............ 510
Engine switch ......................................205
Fog light switch................................... 229
Four-wheel drive control
switch ...................................................303
Garage door opener
switches ..............................................445
Headlight cleaner switch...............238
Interior light switch..............................418
Intuitive parking assist...................... 287
Ignition switch......................................205
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)....... 263
Light switches........................................ 221
Meter control switches...................... 93
Moon roof switches .......................... 168
Outside rear view mirror
switches ................................................162
Paddle shift switches.......................... 212
Personal light switch ..........................419
Power back door switch..................124
Power door lock switch.....................117
Power window switch.......................165

Alphabetical index

Rear window wiper and
washer switch...................................235
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers
switch................................................... 405
Seat heater switches.......................... 415
Seat ventilator switches ................... 415
“SOS” button........................................452
Talk switch*
Telephone switches*
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch....................................158
Tire pressure warning reset
switch...................................................488
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button ...................................................275
VSC OFF switch ...............................378
Window lock switch.......................... 165
Windshield wipers and
washer switch.....................................231
Wireless charger power
supply switch ....................................435

T
Tachometer ...............................................88
Tail lights.....................................................221
Light switch .............................................221
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Talk switch*
Telephone switch*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm........................................................... 77
Immobilizer system..............................75

625

Tire inflation pressure......................... 565
Maintenance data..............................565
Warning light....................................... 522
Tire information .................................... 569
Glossary.................................................575
Size .............................................................571
Tire identification number .............570
Uniform Tire Quality Grading.... 573
Tire pressure warning system..........487
Function..................................................487
Initializing ...............................................487
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters................487
Registering ID codes...................... 488
Tire pressure warning reset
switch .................................................. 488
Warning light....................................... 522
Tires ........................................................... 486
Chains.....................................................383
Checking ...............................................486
If you have a flat tire..........................532
Inflation pressure................................495
Replacing...............................................532
Rotating tires........................................486
Size ...........................................................565
Snow tires..............................................382
Spare tire................................... 532, 565
Tire pressure warning system.....487
Warning light....................................... 522
Tools .......................................................... 532
Total load capacity...............................558

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

626

Alphabetical index

Towing
Dinghy towing .....................................204
Emergency towing............................. 512
Towing eyelet........................................ 514
Trailer Sway Control........................ 377
Trailer towing ........................................ 187
TRAC (Traction Control) ..................377
Trailer Sway Control............................377
Trailer towing ...........................................187
Transmission
Automatic transmission ................... 210
Downshift restriction warning
buzzer ................................................... 215
Driving mode select switch ..........284
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .................................... 215
Paddle shift switches ..........................212
Trip meters .................................................89
Troubleshooting....................................608
Turn signal lights .....................................217
Replacing light bulbs.......................508
Turn signal lever ...................................217

U
USB port*
Utility vehicle precautions ................386

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

V
Vanity lights ..............................................431
Vanity lights............................................431
Vanity mirrors..........................................431
Vehicle data recordings...........................9
Vehicle identification number ........ 559
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC).....377
Ventilators (seat ventilators) .............415
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control).....377
W
Warning buzzers ................................. 520
Approach warning ........................... 276
Brake system .......................................520
Downshifting..........................................215
Driver’s seat belt reminder ........... 522
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder............................................. 522
Intuitive parking assist......................290
Lane departure...................................265
Master warning system .................. 522
Open back door................................ 522
Open door ........................................... 522
Open moon roof.................................170
Parking brake ......................................523
PCS ............................................................521
Power steering system ................... 522
Radar cruise control ........................ 276
Seat belt reminder............................. 522

Alphabetical index

Warning lights .......................................520
ABS.......................................................... 520
Automatic headlight leveling
system ................................................... 521
Brake system........................... 520, 523
Center differential lock....................522
Charging system............................... 520
Low fuel level .......................................522
Low speed four-wheel
drive ......................................................522
Malfunction indicator lamp.......... 520
Master warning light.........................522
Open door............................................522
Parking brake.......................................522
PCS............................................................ 521
Power steering system....................522
Seat belt reminder light...................522
Slip indicator.......................................... 521
SRS........................................................... 520
Tire pressure ........................................522

627

Warning messages.............................. 528
Warning reflector holder.................. 428
Washer........................................... 231, 235
Checking ...............................................485
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................382
Switch ............................................231, 235
Washing and waxing .......................... 458
Weights....................................................558
Wheels ..................................................... 499
Replacing wheels ..............................532
Size ...........................................................565
Window glasses......................................165
Window lock switch..............................165
Windows
Power windows....................................165
Rear window defogger ..................405
Washer.........................................231, 235
Windshield wiper de-icer................. 405
Windshield wipers.................................231
Winter driving tips ............................... 382
Wireless charger.................................. 435
Wireless remote control key.............. 110
Locking/Unlocking ............................. 110
Panic mode ............................................... 111
Replacing the battery ......................503
WMA disc*

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

628
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel filler door

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 240

P. 472

Tire inflation pressure

Fuel filler door opener

Hood lock release lever

P. 565

P. 240

P. 472

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
Fuel type

24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 Imp.gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only

P. 560

Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
Engine oil type

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

P. 565
With filter
Without filter

7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

P. 560

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Has XFA                         : No
Language                        : en
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Modify Date                     : 2017:10:05 09:04:55-05:00
Create Date                     : 2017:10:05 09:04:55-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:10:05 09:04:55-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:f58f9286-57e3-4231-b3d1-6023a4cad6df
Instance ID                     : uuid:5ce150e8-528b-4009-96de-d828704309bf
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 628

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

OM60Q78U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation